JP7370058B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the result of the stoppage after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-202037 Publication

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing for advancing the game needs to be performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform processing for advancing the game. .

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a situation setting means for setting a specific situation in which advantageous transition is possible;
advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player in the case of the specific situation;
first advantageous termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a state termination opportunity in the advantageous gaming state;
a first situation ending means that ends the specific situation to become a predetermined situation based on the occurrence of a situation ending opportunity in the specific situation;
a second advantageous termination means that terminates the advantageous gaming state even if the condition termination opportunity has not occurred when the specific situation is terminated by the first situation termination means;
when the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous termination means, a second situation termination means terminates the specific situation and sets the predetermined situation even if the situation termination opportunity has not occurred;
termination correspondence display execution means for causing a display means to perform a termination correspondence display when the advantageous gaming state ends, and for causing the termination correspondence display to continue until the specific situation is newly set;
a setting means for setting a setting value corresponding to a player's advantage as a target for use;
It is possible to execute a suggestion performance that makes it possible to suggest the setting value set as the target of use in a situation where the advantageous gaming state and the specific situation are ended and the second situation ending means becomes the predetermined situation. Meanwhile, means for preventing the suggestion effect from being executed in the predetermined situation after the start of supply of predetermined operating power;
Equipped with
The predetermined situation when the specific situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity is better than the predetermined situation when the specific situation ends in a situation where the situation end opportunity has not occurred. , characterized in that the above-mentioned suggestion effect is easily executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform processing for advancing the game.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. FIG. 3 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. (a) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on a dual-purpose display section. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table in a non-bonus state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table in RT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition data acquisition process performed by main side MPU. (a) A connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) a diagram showing drive characteristics of a stepping motor. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of phase excitation. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining an acceleration table, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a stop table. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main side RAM used to execute rotation control of each reel. 3 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop control process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how the rotation control of each reel is executed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing when the game ends, which is executed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section that exist in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonuses performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing RT processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the reels are stopped when a reel stopping operation is performed in accordance with the reverse push notification when the reverse push notification is executed; 3 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing control processing of a bet display unit executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing pseudo bet handling processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart showing bet notification control processing executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how bet notification is carried out. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the time of the game start performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the performance mode in the additional period. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining image display for determining which of the first to third production modes to use as the production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the production mode performed by production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the type of performance mode to be executed in the additional period is determined during the selection period of the performance mode. 12 is a flowchart showing additional period processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart showing the production control process during the add-on period executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the setting mode of the midway freeze period differs depending on whether or not the reel stop order is notified. 3 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a stop order notification process at the time of AT, which is executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how reverse push notification is executed when the index value IV=10 is won, and (b) forward push notification is executed when the index value IV=10 is won. FIG. It is a flow chart showing production control processing during AT executed by the production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display content of the ending confirmation effect executed on the image display device, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display content of the ending effect executed on the image display device. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of display contents of a transition waiting effect executed by the image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the termination control process performed by production side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing the operation details of the slot machine when the ending condition is satisfied in the AT state. 3 is a flowchart showing non-migration compatible processing executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transfer continuous counter and the setting value set as the current usage target, and (b) each setting suggestion lottery FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a table. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the low expectation command is executed on the image display device, and (b) the effect corresponding to the medium setting command is executed on the image display device. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the high setting command is executed on the image display device. It is a flow chart showing production control processing during non-AT executed by the production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the game number range of the number of unlocked games and the type of transition mode, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each transition suggestion lottery table. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first transition image displayed on an image display device, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second transition image displayed on an image display device, (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 3rd transition picture displayed on an image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing the execution contents of the performance from the first section until the transition to the second section occurs. 3 is a flowchart showing external output setting processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the output level of the AT signal is switched. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process performed by the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process performed by main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the termination control process performed by production side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing production control processing during non-AT executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional periods performed by the main side MPU in 5th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 has a plurality of wooden panels fixed to it, so that the casing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open toward the front.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 using a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. Note that the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side thereof, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semitransparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window portion 21L, 21M, and 21R. There is. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

These reels 32L, 32M, 32R are each connected to a stepping motor 33, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor 33. It has become. Since each of these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has a similar configuration, the left reel 32L will be described here as an example based on FIG. 4. Note that FIG. 4 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical skeleton member 34 forming a cylindrical cage, and a belt-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 4) wound endlessly around the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical skeleton member 34. The belt is attached to the cylindrical frame member 34 via a pair of seals formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt. The center of the cylindrical frame member 34 is attached to the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33 rotates, the cylindrical frame member 34 rotates about the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L rotates.

The stepping motor 33 is screwed to the side surface of a motor plate 35 that is disposed in an upright position within the reel unit 31 . A reel index sensor 36 in which a light emitting element 36a and a light receiving element 36b are held at a predetermined interval is installed on the motor plate 35. On the other hand, a sensor cut bang 37 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the cylindrical frame member 34 by screws. The tip end 37a of the sensor cut bun 37 is bent at a substantially right angle and positioned so that it can pass between the two elements 36a and 36b of the reel index sensor 36. Each time the left reel 32L rotates once, the reel index sensor 36 detects the passage of the tip end 37a of the sensor cut bun 37, and each time a detection signal is output to the main controller 70, which will be described later. Therefore, the main controller 70 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L every rotation based on this detection signal. Note that the combination of the stepping motor 33, cylindrical frame member 34, motor plate 35, reel index sensor 36, and sensor cut van 37 is provided for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, so the main controller 70 It is possible to individually confirm that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated once.

For example, the stepping motor 33 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by applying an excitation signal of 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 33, that is, the rotational position of the left reel 32L, is controlled by this number of steps. be done. On each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols, specifically 21 symbols, are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). In this case, it takes 24 steps (ie, 24 pulses) to switch from one symbol to the next at a predetermined position. Then, the output of 24 steps is performed 21 times, resulting in 504 steps corresponding to one round. The main controller 70 determines which symbols can be visually recognized from the display window 21L for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the number of steps (i.e., the number of pulses) from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 36 is output. It is possible to perform control to recognize whether the current state is present or to make an arbitrary pattern visible from the display window 21L.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of gaming media (or gaming value), which is either a medal or a virtual medal, has been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the same time.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is arranged directly below the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is pressed after the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R has finished accelerating and started rotating at a constant speed, and the corresponding sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the corresponding reel index sensor 36. The stop operation is then enabled.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44. The period until the execution of various processes such as the granting of a number and the management of the gaming state is completed corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 if the acceptance is permitted, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal outlet 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of dispensing medals stored in a storage tank to a medal receiving tray 59 through a medal discharge port 58 when a winning is achieved corresponding to the provision of game media on the main lines ML1 to ML5, which will be described later. have. As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal slot 45, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 become stuck in the selector 52.

At the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit input button 47 is provided for inputting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time. In this slot machine 10, the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (that is, bet set) at one time is "3". If the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "0" and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of virtual medals will be reduced by three and the number of bets will be "3". ”. If the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "1" and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced to "3" instead of the number of virtual medals decreasing by two. ”. If the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "2" and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of virtual medals will be reduced by one and the number of bets will be "3". ”. Note that if the credit input button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current number of bets and the number of available bets, the number of bets will be equal to the number of virtual medals. As the number of virtual medals increases, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus inserted medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in a situation where virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as real medals. Further, when the settlement button 51 is operated in a situation where game media are bet, medals corresponding to the number of game media bet are paid out from the medal ejection port 58. Furthermore, if the settlement button 51 is operated in a situation where game media is bet and virtual medals are stored and stored, the total number of betted game media and the number of stored virtual medals is calculated. A number of medals are dispensed from the medal ejection port 58.

Inside the housing 11, on the left side of the hopper device 53, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 that resets various states of the slot machine 10, and a reset button 56 that resets the setting values of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". A setting key insertion hole 57 is provided into which a setting key owned by the game hall manager is inserted and operated in order to make changes within the range of .

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 5 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to correspond to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main controller 70, which will be described later, from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. This is a number to recognize the symbols in a certain state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

Symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), " Red 7” symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (For example, the 5th position on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 6 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, five main lines ML1 to ML5 are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The first main line ML1 is a line connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, and the second main line ML2 is the line connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, The third main line ML3 is a line that connects the upper symbols and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R, and the third main line ML3 is a line that connects the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The 4th main line ML4 is a line connecting the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the lower symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, and the 5th main line ML5 is the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. This is a line connecting the symbols and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a predetermined number (specifically, "3") of gaming media bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on one of the main lines ML1 to ML5. If the result is established, any one of the benefits of providing game media, the benefits of replaying, and the transition of the gaming state will be provided. That is, in this slot machine 10, five main lines ML1 to ML5 are set as lines on which winnings can be achieved. Each of the main lines ML1 to ML5 is set as a line extending in a straight line.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that will be awarded when winning will be explained. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

The minor prizes for which game media are awarded are the 1st supplementary prize, the 2nd supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 6th supplementary prize, the 7th supplementary prize, and the 8th supplementary prize. There are supplementary prizes, 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, special bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes, 2nd watermelon prizes, and cherry prizes. Specifically, on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7". If it is a symbol, it will be the first supplementary prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol. , will be the second supplementary prize winner. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol. , the third supplementary prize winner. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, This will be the 4th supplementary prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, This will be the 5th supplementary prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BELL" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BELL" symbol, This will be the 6th supplementary prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "White 7" symbol. , the 7th supplementary prize winner. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "White 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol. , the 8th supplementary prize winner. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. , the 9th supplementary prize winner. In the case of any of the first to ninth supplementary winnings, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "1".

In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol. , on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "White 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol. In some cases, or on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "White 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is "Replay". If it is a symbol, you will win the first bell. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, 2nd bell prize winner. On any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol. If there is, it will be a special bell prize. If the first bell is won, the second bell is won, or the special bell is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "15".

In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, The first watermelon wins. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, 2nd watermelon prize winner. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "5". In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "cherry" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, It will be a cherry prize. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "2".

Winnings in which the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media is given include a normal replay winning, a first chance replay winning, a second chance replay winning, and a special replay winning. Specifically, on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L are "Replay" symbols, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are "Replay" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "Replay" symbols. If so, it will be a regular replay prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, First chance replay prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, This will be a second chance replay prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, This will be a special replay prize.

If any of the above-mentioned replay wins occur, a replay benefit will be granted that will allow you to play the next game without having to bet on game media. Specifically, if one of the replays wins in a game in which "3" gaming media is bet, there is no need to bet on the gaming media, but the next game is played with "3" gaming media bet. It becomes possible to start playing the game.

There are BB winnings and RB winnings as state transition winnings in which only the gaming state transition is performed. Specifically, on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol. 7” pattern, it will be a BB prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, RB wins. When a BB win is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the BB state, and when an RB win is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the RB state.

In the BB state and RB state, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is greater than in the non-AT state (the "expected number of gaming media given in one game" minus "the number of gaming media bet in one game") This is a gaming state in which the value (value obtained) increases. Furthermore, in the BB state and RB state, the net increase expected value of game media in one game (from "expected number of game media provided in one game" to "one game This is a gaming state in which the value obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media bet on is high. Specifically, in addition to winning the combination that makes it possible to win the first bell with a higher probability (for example, approximately 1/1.1) than in other gaming states, if you win the winning combination, each The first bell prize is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The BB state and the RB state continue over a plurality of games, and end when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the present slot machine 10, if the slot machine is in the BB state, the termination condition is set that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is 350 or more. In the RB state, the end condition is set that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is 150 or more.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be explained.

At the top of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided, as well as an image display device 63. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and the sound output is controlled so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, a sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or sound corresponding to the winning result is output. The sound output is controlled so that it is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Other display devices having a display surface may be used, or a dot matrix display may be used. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display screen. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display images corresponding to the winning results of the combinations in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game on the display screen. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 includes a main side bet display section 64 and a production side bet display section 69 that display the number of game media that are currently bet, and a credit display that displays the number of stored virtual medals. 65 and the number of game media to be awarded at the time of winning a small prize, and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the notified content is displayed. A dual-purpose display section 66 is provided to display a display for notifying the game history management results, and a section display section 67 is provided to display a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. There is.

The main side bet display section 64 is provided at the lower left corner of the gaming panel 20. The main side bet display section 64 has three light emitting sections 64a, 64b, and 64c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting sections 64a to 64c uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as red. When the number of game media bet is "1", the lowest light emitting section 64a is turned on and the remaining light emitting sections 64b and 64c are turned off. When the number of game media bet is "2", the bottom and center light emitting parts 64a and 64b are lit, and the top light emitting part 64c is turned off. When the number of game media bet is "3", all three light emitting sections 64a to 64c are lit. After all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in one game, if no replay winning is achieved in that game, each of the main side bet display sections 64 will be displayed when all the processing for one game is completed. All of the light emitting parts 64a to 64c are turned off. This light-off state is maintained until a new bet on game media is placed. When a replay winning is established, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main bet display part 64 are maintained in a lit state. The display of the main side bet display section 64 is controlled by a main controller 70 which will be described later.

The performance side bet display section 69 is arranged in parallel to the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R on the left side of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. The performance side bet display section 69 has five light emitting sections 69a, 69b, and 69c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting sections 69a to 69c uses a single color emitting type LED such as blue. Among these light emitting parts 69a to 69c, the central light emitting part 69a is arranged horizontally to the third main line ML3, and the pair of upper and lower light emitting parts 69b are arranged horizontally to the second main line ML2 and the fourth main line ML4, respectively. The light emitting parts 69c at both the upper and lower ends are arranged laterally to the first main line ML1 and the fifth main line ML5, respectively. When the number of game media being bet is "1", the central light emitting section 69a turns on in response to activation of the third main line ML3, and the remaining light emitting sections 69b and 69c turn on. The light goes off. When the number of game media being bet is "2", the second main line ML2 to the fourth main line ML4 are activated, and the three light emitting parts 69a at the center and on both sides above and below the center line are activated. , 69b are turned on, and the light emitting parts 69c at both the upper and lower ends are turned off. When the number of game media being bet is "3", all the main lines ML1 to ML5 are activated, and all five light emitting units 69a to 69c are turned on. After all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in one game, if no replay winning is achieved in that game, each of the reels on the production side bet display section 69 when all the processing for one game is completed. All of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c are turned off. This light-off state is maintained until a new bet on game media is placed. When a replay winning is achieved, all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 are maintained in a lit state, except when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state to be described later. The contents of the display control of the performance side bet display section 69 when a special replay winning is established in the first half RT state will be explained in detail later. Display control of the performance side bet display section 69 is performed by a performance control device 90 which will be described later.

The main side bet display section 64 is provided at the lower left corner of the game panel 20, while the performance side bet display section 69 is provided on the left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, the display range of the production side bet display section 69 is ensured wider than the display range of the main side bet display section 64. Therefore, the performance side bet display section 69 is more likely to attract the attention of the player than the main side bet display section 64.

The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display. Each segment of the 7-segment display uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 8A is a front view of the common display area 68 in which the dual-purpose display section 66 and the section display section 67 are provided. The common display area 68 includes a dual-purpose display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged horizontally in parallel as shown in FIG. 8(a), and a section display section consisting of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

Any of the minor prizes corresponding to the granting of game media (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, or cherry prize) If the small winning combination is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display section 66 at the end of the game in which the small winning combination was achieved. Specifically, if any of the 1st to 9th supplementary winnings is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left will not be displayed, and "1" will be displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right. It is notified that "1" game media has been awarded. If any of the 1st Bell Winning, 2nd Bell Winning, and Special Bell Winning is established, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a, and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. The display notifies that "15" game media have been awarded. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning is achieved, the left 7 segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7 segment display 66b. It is announced that "5" game media have been awarded. Furthermore, when a cherry prize is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right, so that "2" game media is awarded. This will be announced.

On the other hand, even if a winning is achieved in which no gaming media is awarded, such as any replay winning, BB winning, or RB winning, the display corresponding to the winning will not be displayed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case, each The seven segment displays 66a, 66b remain hidden. The display of the number of game media awarded on the dual-purpose display section 66 ends when the game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the timing of this bet. The containers 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 8(b), in this slot machine 10, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The stop order is that the left reel 32L is the first stop, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. A stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, and a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are arbitrary. There is an arbitrary stopping order and a stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

In the image display device 63, the stop order is notified by the second bell winning data if the winning combination includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data in the winning combination processing. This may be executed when winning a winning combination that includes , and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data, or when winning a winning combination that includes the 1st bell winning data and special bell winning data. Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data, the reel 32L is moved in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning winning combination among the above-mentioned stopping orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the 1st bell prize is established, and if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination, the 1st to 6th supplementary winnings are made. Either one can hold true. If the first bell win is achieved, "15" gaming media will be awarded to the player as already explained, and if any of the first to sixth supplementary prizes is achieved, "1" will be given to the player as already explained. game media are given to the player.

If you win a combination that includes the 2nd bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will move in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning winning combination among the above stopping orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination, one of the 7th to 9th supplementary wins will be made. obtain. If the second bell win is achieved, "15" game media will be awarded to the player as already explained, and if any of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is achieved, "1" will be given to the player as already explained. game media are given to the player.

If you win a combination that includes the first bell winning data and special bell winning data, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order in which the left reel 32L is stopped first among the above stopping orders. The first bell win is established, and when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order in which the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped first, the first bell win or special bell win is established. If the first bell winning or the special bell winning is achieved, "15" gaming media will be awarded to the player as already explained.

When any of the above stop orders is notified on the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display section 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is displayed. This display content is as shown in FIG. 8(b), and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in one-to-one correspondence with the stop order notification content on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 may be set to correspond to some or all of the stop order notification contents on the image display device 63. Good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. unit display images GL, GM, and GR are displayed, and in each unit display image GL, GM, and GR, images corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. Specifically, a left unit display image GL corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image GM corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image GR corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 9(a) shows how the stop order is announced when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , the left unit display image GL displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image GM displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image GR.

On the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed as described above, whereas on the dual-purpose display section 66, as shown in FIG. "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, unit display images GL, GM, and GR corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and in each unit display image GL, GM, and GR, corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. An image corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, whereas an image is displayed that is independent of the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, even if a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the dual-purpose display section 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. Also from this point of view, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the dual-purpose display section 66 compared to the image display device 63. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the opposite side to the image display device 63 across the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the dual-purpose display section 66 is placed at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display section 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponds to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 is displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a command to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. will be terminated if this occurs.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged at the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display section 67 is arranged at the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section refers to the second section of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. By notifying the stop order, the expected value of acquiring gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") becomes 1 or more. This is a section where an advantageous gaming state (specifically, an AT state) can be started and where the advantageous gaming state can continue. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not start and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The section display section 67 is maintained in an off state in the first section, and turns on in the second section. When the section display section 67 is turned on, it remains lit until the second section ends, and turns off when the second section ends and shifts to the first section. .

As described above, when the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the second section, and the dual-purpose display is provided collectively in the common display area 68. The unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. It is turned on when the game ends, and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, only the section display section 67 in the common display area 68 lights up in the situation of the second section. This makes it possible to actively bring about the current situation, and it becomes easier for the game hall manager to check the section display section 67.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the section display section 67 remains lit in the second section, a structure may be adopted in which the section display section 67 flashes at a predetermined period. Furthermore, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the dual-purpose display section 66 and the section display section 67.

Next, various control devices will be explained.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b forming the back side of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in a board box 81 such that an opposing wall 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and also to expose the internal space of the housing 11. It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with a structure to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when these case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81 . As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some joints 83, another joint By bringing 83 into the connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, since the joint 83 is destroyed when the case body is separated, and traces thereof remain, it is possible to determine whether or not the case body has been illegally separated by visually checking the joint part 83. Become. Further, a sealing sticker 84 is pasted on one side of the board box 81 other than the one side on which the coupling portion 83 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 84 if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The production control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The production control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box like the main control device 70.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 10.

As already explained, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 includes an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there are reel index sensors 36 for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and an individual sensor that detects the operation of each stop button 42, 43, and 44. stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that detect, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion detection sensor 47a that detects operation of credit insertion button 47, and operation of settlement button 51. The payment detection sensor 51a detects, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 is detected. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 includes a stepping motor 33 for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31, a selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor for the hopper device 53, a main side bet display section 64, and a credit display. section 65 (not shown in FIG. 10), a dual-purpose display section 66, a section display section 67, an effect control device 90, and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is permitted, and directs them to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging medals to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting them. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. and the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the main side bet display section 64 so that when a bet on game media occurs, the number of bets is notified. Furthermore, when virtual game media are stored, the MPU 72 controls the display of the credit display section 65 so that the number of stored virtual game media is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that when the award of game media occurs, the number of game media to which the award is made is displayed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that, when it is the second section, it is notified that it is the second section. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management results is displayed.

The MPU 72 transmits a command to the production control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also sends a command to the production control device 90 to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is displayed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the effect control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complicated display control, and the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed by the MPU 72. Thereby, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes improving the degree of attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply section and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes processing at the time of power outage by receiving the power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power outage power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power outage power in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data will be retained in the RAM 74 when backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done.

The production control device 90 includes a production control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various productions. The production control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94 is built in, as well as a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply part of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, an image display device 63, and a production side bet display section 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, the display control of the image display device 63, and the light emission control of the performance side bet display section 69 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. By doing so, various notifications and various effects can be carried out.

Although not shown, the production control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sends a drawing list that instructs the content of the image corresponding to each update timing to the VDP according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are called MPU92, production side ROM93, and production side RAM94.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 72>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by a timer interrupt process is enabled, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key being turned on (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not pressed when turning on the power (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clearing process (step S104), the setting value updating process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after performing an all clear process (step S105), a setting value update process is executed (step S106). In the all clear process (step S105), all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized, whereas in the partial clear process (step S104), the area where BB winning data is stored and the RB winning data are initialized in the main side RAM 74. Areas other than the area where the information is stored, the area where information indicating the BB state is stored, and the area where the information indicating the RB state is stored are initialized.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, so a credit display is displayed at the start of the setting value update process. In the section 65, a display corresponding to the set value being "1" is displayed. In the setting value update process, each time the reset button 56 is operated, the setting value is updated by 1, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended. Thereafter, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, if the set value is one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If an affirmative determination is made in all steps S108 to S110, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is prohibited (step S115), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager, etc. of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" or not. If the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and a power outage process is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 74 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes starting from step S204 are performed. In step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor 33 provided on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the production side MPU 92. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, a bet display section control process for controlling the light emission of the main side bet display section 64 is performed. In step S213, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72.

In step S214, a management process is executed to manage the game history and display contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games is calculated. Furthermore, on the condition that the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where no game is being played, the ratio of the most recent calculation result is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games is calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the ratio information that is performed for each setting value. Thereafter, in step S215, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 13.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Thereafter, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 10) provided in the main side RAM 74 is the upper limit number of bets (step S401). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the game to be executed. The upper limit for bets is "3". If a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined whether or not the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the credit counter 74b provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S402). The credit counter 74b is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of stored virtual game media.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, a bet setting process is executed (step S403). In the bet setting process, if the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "0" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 3 or more, the value of the credit counter 74b is subtracted by 3. Instead, 3 is added to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, when the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "1" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, instead of subtracting 2 from the value of the credit counter 74b, 2 is added to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, when the credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, instead of subtracting 1 from the value of the credit counter 74b. 1 is added to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, if the credit input button 47 is operated when the value of the credit counter 74b is smaller than the difference between the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added to the value of the credit counter 74b. Instead of adding the value of , the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a bet setting command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S404). The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after being updated by the current bet setting process (step S403). In other words, information about the current number of bets is included in the bet setting command. Thereby, when the number of bets changes, it becomes possible for the performance side MPU 92 to specify the number of bets after the change.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S401, if a negative determination is made in step S402, or if the process of step S404 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects 1 because a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether or not five medals have been detected (step S405). When an affirmative determination is made in step S405, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S406: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S407). ), and transmits a bet setting command to the production side MPU 92 (step S408). The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after being updated in step S407. In other words, information about the current number of bets is included in the bet setting command. Thereby, when the number of bets changes, it becomes possible for the performance side MPU 92 to specify the number of bets after the change. If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is the maximum bet number (step S406: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S409), and a credit increase command is sent to the production side MPU 92 ( Step S410). The credit increase command does not include information indicating the value of the credit counter 74b.

When the process of step S408 or step S410 is executed, the condition is that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is the upper limit number of bets and the value of the credit counter 74b is the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"). (step S411: YES), and executes reception prohibition processing (step S412). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative determination is made in step S405, if a negative determination is made in step S411, or if the process of step S412 is executed, on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S413 : YES), the bet setting completed flag at the time of acceptance provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S414). The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game has been betted. Thereafter, a process of turning off the credit input button 47 is executed (step S415). A light emitting unit (not shown) is provided on the back side of the credit input button 47, and the light is emitted when the game is not being executed and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is less than the upper limit number of bets "3". The light emitting section is turned on, and the light emitting section is turned off in a situation where the game is being executed or when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" which is the upper limit number of bets. By executing the process of step S415, the credit input button 47 changes from a lit state to an unlit state. As a result, the player is notified that further bets on game media are not possible. Note that even if the game is not being executed and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is less than the upper limit number of bets of "3", if the value of the credit counter 74b is "0", A configuration may be adopted in which the credit input button 47 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S413 or if the process of step S415 is executed, it is determined whether the payment button 51 has been operated (step S416). If the settlement button 51 is operated (step S416: YES), it is determined whether or not the bet setting flag for replay provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S417). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game have already been set when any replay winnings have been achieved in the previous game. This is a flag for

If a negative determination is made in step S417, a settlement process is executed (step S418). In the settlement process, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged into the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the bet setting flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S419). Further, a settlement command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S420). The performance side MPU 92 receives the payment command and executes processing corresponding to the execution of the payment processing.

If a negative determination is made in step S416, if an affirmative determination is made in step S417, or if the process of step S420 is executed, pseudo bet handling processing is executed (step S421). The pseudo bet handling process will be explained in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the normal process (FIG. 13), after executing the start waiting process in step S302, either the bet set flag at the time of replay or the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), all of the main lines ML1 to ML5 are validated, and then reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to perform various settings when the game is started, and in step S307, a role lottery process is executed to perform a lottery for the role in the current game. In steps S308 to S312, freeze processing is executed, and in step S313, reel control processing is performed to drive and control each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current winning combination. In step S314, a process corresponding to the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the game state and game period corresponding to the result of the current game.

After that, a medium attachment process is executed (step S315). In the media granting process, when a minor winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for granting the player a number of game media corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current minor prize winning is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit storage memory number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59. In addition, in the media awarding process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media that is currently subject to award is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until a new bet on game media is made.

Thereafter, in steps S316 and S317, processing for freezing is executed, in step S318, external output setting processing for outputting the status of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed, and in step S319, the game Execute a setting process at the end of the game to perform various settings at the end of the game. Then, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S320). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53. However, if the game is a game in which a replay prize has been won and the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is the upper limit storage memory number, the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 will be inserted without executing the acceptance permission process. A state is maintained in which the medals are discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the medal detection sensor 45a.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the winning combination lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 15.

First, a random number used when determining the validity of a winning combination is obtained (step S501). This slot machine 10 is configured to latch the random number from the random number circuit 75 when the start lever 41 is operated. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers from "0" to "65535", and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, a lottery table for determining the validity of the combination is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S502). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it on, as well as performing a predetermined operation. It is possible to set which setting value corresponds to the winning probability on which the winning combination processing is to be executed. When the set value is "n+1", the winning probability is more advantageous for the player than when the set value is "n". Specifically, since the probability of winning a given combination is higher when the set value is "n+1" than when the set value is "n", it is more advantageous for the player when the set value is "n+1" than when the set value is "n". . Furthermore, there are a non-bonus state (including a non-AT state and an AT state), a BB state, an RB state, and an RT state (including a non-AT state and an AT state) as gaming states. The RT state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay combination is higher than in other gaming states. It should be noted that if a replay winning combination is won, a replay winning is guaranteed, so the RT state is also a gaming state in which the probability of a replay winning is higher than other gaming states. In step S502, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking as an example the case where the set value is "3", a lottery table in a state that is neither BB state nor RB state will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning lottery table in a non-bonus state that is neither BB state, RB state, nor RT state, and FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning lottery table in RT state. . Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 18 as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, index values IV are set in the winning combination lottery table in both the non-bonus state and the RT state. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the random number circuit 75. Additionally, the number of index values IV is the same in the non-bonus state and in the RT state, and the type of winning data set for each index value IV is also the same in the non-bonus state and in the RT state. It has become.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data. If you win with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. If the third stop (the reel where the last stop command was issued) is the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the first bell is guaranteed to win regardless of the timing of operating each stop button 42 to 44. , and in other cases, the first supplementary prize may be established. If you win with index value IV=2, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the fourth supplementary winning can be achieved. If you win with index value IV=3, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the third supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=4, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the sixth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=5, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the second supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=6, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the fifth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases.

In this slot machine 10, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main lines ML1 to ML5 depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this event is referred to as the so-called "missed" symbol). ). The 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, and various replay prizes are winnings that will not be missed if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the 1st to 9th supplementary prizes, the 1st Watermelon winnings, second watermelon winnings, cherry winnings, BB winnings, and RB winnings are winning modes that may be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the index values IV=7 to 9, the second bell winning data is set and one of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data is set. In the case of winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh supplementary winning can be achieved. If you win with index value IV = 8, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and third and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. The second bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the timing, and the ninth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=9, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and third and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. A second bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the timing, and an eighth supplementary prize can be achieved in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the index value IV=10 is set with first bell winning data and special bell winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special bell winning can be achieved regardless of the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the special bell prize cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the first bell prize is established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the second and third stop targets and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other words, in the case of winning with the index value IV = 10 and the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, priority is given to establishing a special bell prize, and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44 To ensure that a first bell prize is established when a special bell prize cannot be established due to timing.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. In the case of winning with the index value IV=11, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. In the case of winning with index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 18, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=13. In the case of a win with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 18, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=14. If a win is achieved with the index value IV = 14, the first chance replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, as shown in FIG. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 18, the second chance replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the index value IV=16 is set with normal replay winning data and special replay winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. Normal replay winnings are surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay winning can be achieved regardless of the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the special replay winning cannot be achieved depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing at which a special replay winning is not achieved, a normal replay winning is definitely achieved. In other words, in the case of a win with index value IV=16 and the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, priority is given to establishing a special replay prize, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is To ensure that a normal replay winning is achieved when a special replay winning cannot be achieved due to the relationship.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17. When a win is achieved with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 18, the normal replay win is reliably achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the index value IV=18 is set with cherry winning data and BB winning data. When a win is achieved with the index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 18, a cherry win or a BB win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=18, priority is given to establishing a BB prize regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when a BB prize cannot be established. If this happens, priority will be given to establishing a cherry prize. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the cherry winning nor the BB winning will be achieved. Note that this is not limited to this, and if a win is achieved with the index value IV = 18, the establishment of a cherry prize will take priority regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the establishment of a cherry prize will not be possible. It may be configured such that when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing such that the establishment of a BB prize is prioritized.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only BB winning data is set to the index value IV=19. In the case of a win with the index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 18, a BB win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that a BB prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, cherry winning data and RB winning data are set to index value IV=20. When a win is achieved with the index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 18, a cherry win or an RB win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=20, priority is given to establishing an RB win regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when an RB win cannot be established. If this happens, priority will be given to establishing a cherry prize. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the cherry winning nor the RB winning will be achieved. Note that this is not limited to this, and if a win is achieved with the index value IV = 20, the establishment of a cherry prize will take priority regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the establishment of a cherry prize will not be possible. It may be configured such that when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing such that RB winning is given priority.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the RB winning data is set to the index value IV=21. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV=21, as shown in FIG. 18, the RB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that an RB win will not be achieved.

Here, winning data other than BB winning data and RB winning data will be erased in the winning game regardless of whether the corresponding winning is achieved or not, and will not be retained in subsequent games after the winning game. Not exceeded. On the other hand, the BB winning data and the RB winning data indicate that the corresponding winning data will not be displayed even if the game is the one after the winning game, except when the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105). It is stored and retained until it is established. In this case, even if the game is in a state where either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is carried over, the index value IV (specifically, the index value IV) corresponding to each of the BB winning data and the RB winning data =18 to 21) are subject to lottery, but even if the index value IV is won, the BB winning data and RB winning data corresponding to the winning index value IV are newly stored in the main side RAM 74. Never. This makes it possible to prevent BB winning data and RB winning data from being stored cumulatively.

The probability of winning when the index value IV = 1 to 15, 18 to 21 is the case where the winning lottery table in the non-bonus state in Figure 16 is selected and the winning lottery table in the RT state in Figure 17 is selected. It is the same in both cases. Specifically, the probability of winning when index value IV=1, the probability of winning when index value IV=2, the probability of winning when index value IV=3, and the probability of winning when index value IV=4. probability of winning when index value IV=5, probability of winning when index value IV=6, probability of winning when index value IV=7, probability of winning when index value IV= The probability of winning when the index value is 8 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are approximately 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when index value IV=10 is about 1/728, the probability of winning when index value IV=11 is about 1/164, and when index value IV=12, the probability of winning is about 1/164. The probability of winning is approximately 1/146, the probability of winning when index value IV = 13 is approximately 1/423, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 14 is approximately 1/328. Yes, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is approximately 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when index value IV = 18 is approximately 1/437, the probability of winning when index value IV = 19 is approximately 1/437, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 20 is approximately 1/437. The probability of winning is approximately 1/655, and the probability of winning when index value IV=21 is approximately 1/655.

On the other hand, the probability of winning when the index value IV=16, 17 is that the winning lottery table in the RT state in FIG. 17 is selected more than the winning lottery table in the non-bonus state in FIG. 16. The case is higher. Specifically, the probability of winning with the index value IV=16 is about 1/21.8 when the winning lottery table in the non-bonus state in FIG. 16 is selected, whereas in the case of FIG. When the winning combination lottery table in the RT state is selected, it is approximately 1/6.55. Furthermore, the probability of winning with index value IV = 17 is about 1/10.9 when the lottery table in the non-bonus state in Fig. 16 is selected, whereas in the RT state in Fig. 17, the probability of winning is about 1/10.9. When the winning combination lottery table is selected, it is approximately 1/3.28. The above-mentioned tendency of the winning probability is not limited to the case where the set value is "3", and the same applies to other set values.

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), after selecting the lottery table in step S502 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S503), the determination value DV used to determine the validity of the winning combination is set. settings (step S504). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S501 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to the value of the random number. is added to obtain a new judgment value DV.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (step S505). In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S505: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S506).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S505: NO), it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S507), it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined (step S508). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S504 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S504, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used for determining the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S505, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S506 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S508, it means that the determination of the validity of the winning combination has ended. In this case, a first stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S509). Thereafter, in step S510, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S511, a first control process for the game section is executed, and in step S512, a stop order notification control process is executed. The processing contents of steps S510 to S512 will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S513). In the transmission process, if any role has been won in the current role lottery process (Figure 15), information corresponding to the winning role and information corresponding to the current gaming state are sent. and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S510 and S511 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. .

When the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps various information regarding the current game from the game start command. Then, the performance side MPU 92 determines the content of the performance in a manner according to the various information grasped. Then, a data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled, and the display of the image display device 63 is performed. Execute control.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process executed in step S506.

It is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=18 to 21 has been won in the lottery process for the current winning combination (step S601). When a negative determination is made in step S601, the winning data set corresponding to the index value IV of the current winning is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S608). If one of the index values IV=18 to 21 is won in the lottery process for the current role (step S601: YES), it is determined whether BB winning data or RB winning data is already stored in the main side RAM 74. (Step S602).

If both BB winning data and RB winning data are not stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S602: NO), if the winning index value IV=18 or 19 (step S603: YES), BB winning The data is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S604), and if the index value IV=20 or 21 is won (step S603: NO), the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S605). Then, if the process of step S604 or step S605 is executed and the winning index value IV is 18 or 20 (step S606: YES), the cherry winning data is further stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S607). As a result, in a situation where both the BB winning data and the RB winning data are not stored in the main side RAM 74, when the winning index value IV=18, both the cherry winning data and the BB winning data are stored in the main side RAM 74. If the index value IV=19 is won, the BB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and if the index value IV=20 is won, both the cherry winning data and the RB winning data are stored in the main side RAM 74. If the winning index value IV is 21, the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

On the other hand, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S602: YES), the processes of steps S603 to S605 are not executed. If the winning index value IV is 18 or 20 (step S606: YES), the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S607). As a result, in a situation where either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, even if you win with index value IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will be Winning data is not newly stored in the main side RAM 74. However, not only the BB winning data but also the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=18, and the cherry winning data as well as the RB winning data is set to the index value IV=20, so the index value IV When winning =18 or 20, the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 even if either BB winning data or RB winning data is already stored in the main RAM 74.

As mentioned above, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, even if the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18 to 21, the winning will trigger the BB winning. Since the processing by the program is set so that the data or RB winning data is not newly stored in the main side RAM 74, it depends on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. Even without changing the type of winning combination lottery table, it is possible to prevent BB winning data and RB winning data from being stored cumulatively in the main side RAM 74. By not changing the type of winning lottery table depending on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the winning lottery table can be drawn according to whether or not the winning data is stored. Since there is no need to prepare a table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the winning lottery table.

If either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, even if you win with index value IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will be stored as a trigger for the winning. Even if the data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV is 18 or 20 and the winning occurs. Cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the cherry winning data is selectively stored, and the probability that the cherry winning data is stored varies depending on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process executed in step S313 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. Prior to explaining the reel control process, the stepping motor 33 for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained in more detail.

FIG. 20(a) is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 33, and FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 33. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of phase excitation.

As the stepping motor 33, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used. Note that the stepping motor is not limited to a hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the hybrid stepping motor 33 includes a rotor 85 disposed at the center and a stator 86 disposed around the rotor 85 and having first to fourth poles 86a to 86d. It is equipped with The rotor 85 is composed of a front rotor 85a magnetized to the north pole and a back rotor 85b magnetized to the south pole, and has teeth provided around the front rotor 85a. In between, the rear rotor 85b is attached to the rotating shaft with a relative shift of 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the rear rotor 85b are positioned. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 85a and the rear rotor 85b.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), the first pole 86a and the third pole 86c are bifilar-wound with an excitation coil L0 and an excitation coil L2, with the end of the excitation coil L0 and the start end of the excitation coil L2. is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply +B (for example, +24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound on the second pole 86b and the fourth pole 86d, and the winding end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3 are connected, and the above-mentioned DC is connected here. Power supply +B is applied.

An excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 86a, and the phase in which the first pole 86a is excited to the S pole and the third pole 86c is excited to the N pole is defined as the A phase. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the pole 86c to excite the first pole 86a to the north pole and the third pole 86c to the south pole is referred to as an inverse A phase. Similarly, an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 86b, and the phase in which the second pole 86b is excited to the S pole and the fourth pole 86d is excited to the N pole is defined as the B phase. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 86d to excite the second pole 86b to the north pole and the fourth pole 86d to the south pole is referred to as a reverse B phase.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 33 is given as excitation data to a motor driver 87 shown in FIG. 20(b). This excitation data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. This excitation data determines the excitation phase for the stepping motor 33, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 33 is driven by one-phase excitation, the rotor 85 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying an excitation signal to the A phase, B phase, reversed A phase, and reversed B phase. It can be rotated. In other words, for example, when the A phase is first energized, the protrusion of the first pole 86a, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 85a, and the protrusion of the third pole 86c, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 85b. are facing each other by attraction force, and then when the B phase is energized, the protrusion of the second pole 86b which has become the S pole and the teeth of the front side rotor 85a, the protrusion of the fourth pole 86d which has become the N pole and the rear side rotation The teeth of the child 85b face each other due to the attraction force, and then when the reverse A phase is energized, the protrusion of the first pole 86a becomes the N pole, the teeth of the back rotor 85b, and the third pole 86c becomes the S pole. The protrusions of the second pole 86b and the teeth of the front rotor 85a face each other due to the attraction force, and then when the reverse B phase is energized, the protrusions of the second pole 86b, which has become the north pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 85b, become the south pole. The protrusion of the fourth pole 86d and the teeth of the front rotor 85a face each other due to the suction force. By energizing in this order, the rotor 85 rotates clockwise in FIG. 20(a).

In this slot machine 10, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately performed during the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to constant speed rotation, and during the period for maintaining constant speed rotation. A 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted. In the 1-2 phase excitation drive, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (1) to (8). In other words, excitation of only one set is 1-phase excitation, and excitation of 2 phases at the same time is 2-phase excitation, so as shown in FIG. (1-phase excitation), (2) energize both A-phase and B-phase (2-phase excitation), and so on (3) energize B-phase, (4) both B-phase and reverse A-phase. energize, (5) energize the reverse A phase, (6) energize both the reverse A phase and reverse B phase, (7) energize the reverse B phase, (8) both the reverse B phase and A phase. This is a driving method in which the current is applied to the terminal, and then the process returns to (1). In this embodiment, the reel rotates once by outputting 504 pulses of the excitation signal for switching the excitation phase, so the angle changes based on the excitation signal of one pulse (that is, switching the excitation phase once). That is, the angle change per step is approximately 0.714°.

FIG. 22(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration table in which excitation patterns are set when starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As the initial excitation phase during acceleration, in addition to one-phase excitation in which only a specific excitation phase is driven, two-phase excitation in which two specific excitation phases are simultaneously driven can be considered. Although it varies depending on the size and inertia of the reels, in a normal slot machine, it is possible to accelerate the reels from an initial speed of zero even with one-phase excitation. However, since the rotational torque of two-phase excitation is larger than that of one-phase excitation, two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation in order to obtain a sufficient initial speed.

In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 22(a), after two-phase excitation is set in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 milliseconds, this excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts. For the two-phase excitation as the initial excitation, the excitation order corresponding to the excitation phase at the time of the previous rotation stop is selected from among excitation order 2, excitation order 4, excitation order 6, and excitation order 8 shown in FIG. It happens.

After the state of 2-phase excitation is maintained for 130 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 12), 1-2 phase excitation is repeated alternately, but the holding period of phase excitation is as shown in Fig. 22(a). The excitation holding period of one-phase excitation and the excitation holding period of two-phase excitation are finely controlled. Specifically, 1-phase excitation following 2-phase excitation, which is initial excitation, is performed for 8 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Figure 12), and the next 2-phase excitation is performed for 7 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Figure 12). The retention period is set to gradually become shorter. Finally, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are repeated alternately at intervals of 2 interrupts in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), and finally 1-phase excitation is applied to the 2-interrupt interval in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12). It is set to take place across the board. As described above, since the last part of the acceleration table is one-phase excitation, the first type of phase excitation in the constant speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. In this way, by sequentially shortening the holding period in each phase of excitation as it approaches constant speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be realized in a short time, and a smooth transition to constant speed rotation can be achieved. During constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

Four-phase excitation is used when stopping the stepping motor 33. In four-phase excitation, all of the A phase, reverse A phase, B phase, and reverse B phase are excited. When two opposite phases are excited, the magnetic flux cancels each other out, but while the stepping motor 33 is rotating, a back electromotive force is generated due to the induced voltage, and for example, the torque of the difference between the current flowing in the A phase and the opposite A phase is generated. occurs. In the case of four-phase excitation, the torque is generated between two opposing phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with four-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of four-phase excitation is smaller than that in the case of one-phase excitation.

A case where the stepping motor 33 is stopped using four-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 22(b). FIG. 22(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop table in which excitation patterns are set when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped.

When the stepping motor 33 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 22(b), four-phase excitation is started by generating a stop command in a situation where one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated. . In this case, the timing at which four-phase excitation is started is determined to be the timing after two-phase excitation has been executed for one interrupt. This four-phase excitation continues for 100 interrupts (149 milliseconds). After 4-phase excitation is performed for 100 interrupts, 1-phase excitation is performed for 34 interrupts (50.7 milliseconds), and then the 1-phase excitation is ended. The target phase of this one-phase excitation is one phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle.

As described above, by using four-phase excitation, which has the weakest braking force, at the start of braking, it is possible to smoothly stop the rotor 85 of the stepping motor 33. However, if four-phase excitation is performed due to weak braking force, the rotor 85 will advance to some extent due to inertia from the timing when four-phase excitation is started. The number of steps advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, and although it is possible to grasp the number of steps to some extent at the design stage through experiments using the reel unit 31, it is not constant. Some variation may occur. On the other hand, by performing four-phase excitation for a predetermined period of time and then performing one-phase excitation for a predetermined period of time for one phase corresponding to the target stop angle position, the stop position can be adjusted. It becomes possible to set the position to the designed position.

When determining the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of steps of the stepping motor 33 is used. Specifically, as already explained, in this slot machine 10, 21 symbols are drawn on each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the number of steps required for one rotation is 504 steps. There is. In this case, the number of steps (i.e., The number of steps assigned to each symbol is constant at 24 steps. Therefore, the number of steps from the time when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, the number of times one pulse of excitation signal is output (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched) Based on this, the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped.

The reel control process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 23.

In the reel control process, it is first determined whether a predetermined starting wait period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game (step S701). ). If the start wait period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S701 until the start wait period elapses. If the start wait period has elapsed, the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S702), and the rotation start flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S703). . As a result, acceleration processing of the stepping motor 33 is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating.

Thereafter, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S704). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S704 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the stop button 42 to 44 that was operated this time among the validity period flags 102a to 102c (see FIG. 24) provided in the main side RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether the corresponding validity period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1" (step S705). The validity period flags 102a to 102c are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each stop button 42 to 44 (ie, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R). Each valid period flag 102a to 102c is set to "1" when the rotation of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration period is completed, and the rotation becomes constant speed, and the corresponding reel 32L, 32M , 32R is stopped, it is cleared to "0". That is, a situation in which the valid period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1" corresponds to a situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are enabled.

If the validity period flags 102a to 102c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to have been operated in step S704 are not set to "1" (step S705: NO), the process returns to step S704. Therefore, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the validity period flags 102a to 102c that are not set to "1" are operated, the operation is treated as invalid. If the valid period flags 102a to 102c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to be operated in step S704 are set to "1" (step S705: YES), the current stop buttons 42 to 44 means that the operation is valid. Therefore, processing for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time is executed.

Specifically, first, button extinguishing processing is executed (step S706). A light emitting section (not shown) is provided on the back side of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, respectively. The light emitting section turns on at the timing when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 is enabled, and when the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 is operated. When the control for stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on this, the light goes out. In the button extinguishing process, the light emitting parts corresponding to all the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time, are turned off. When stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R The operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to are disabled. In this case, if the stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the button extinguishing process (step S706) is executed and the stop button 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R is pressed. By turning off all the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are disabled. Although the details will be described later, if there are reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which a stop command has not yet been issued at the timing when the stop control for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which a stop command has been issued this time has been completed, The light emitting portions of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which no stop command has been issued are turned on.

Thereafter, a stop command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S707). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which stop button 42 to 44 has been operated to generate a stop command. After that, on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time, check the symbol number of the reached symbol that reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated. (Step S708). Specifically, the number of pulses of the excitation signal output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being stopped is input (i.e., the number of times the excitation phase is switched) Check the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S709).

In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a stopping mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available, including a stopping mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S709, a value between "0" and "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S710). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (step S711), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reel (step S712). The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop command flags in one-to-one correspondence with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in the reel stop process, among these stop command flags, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32M that are currently being stopped are Set "1" to the stop command flag corresponding to 32R. As a result, control is started to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are currently subject to stop, in a stop control process (FIG. 26) to be described later.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently subject to stop have been stopped (step S713). The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 104a to 104c (see FIG. 24) in one-to-one correspondence with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in step S713, the reels 32L, 32M that are to be stopped this time are , 32R is set to "1" in the stop completion flags 104a to 104c. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time have not been completely stopped, the process waits in step S713. If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are to be stopped this time have been stopped (step S713: YES), it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S714). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S715).

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and by using the stop information, , it becomes possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. .

As the process for setting the above-mentioned stop information, the stop information first setting process is executed in step S509 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and the process is executed in step S715 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). There is a second stop information setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the winning combination lottery process. The second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. .

After executing the second stop information setting process in step S715, the process for freezing is executed in steps S716 to S720, and the process returns to step S704. The freeze processing in steps S716 to S720 will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S714 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S721. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main lines ML1 to ML5 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if it is the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination, winning corresponding processing is executed as winning of the winning combination has been established.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main side RAM 74 so that if the winning is a small prize winning, game media can be awarded in the media granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that a replay setting process is executed in the setting process at the end of the game in step S319 of the normal process (FIG. 13).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S722). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a winning has been achieved this time, and if a winning has been achieved, data indicating the type of winning.

Next, a configuration for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main side RAM 74 used to execute rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIG. 24, the main side RAM 74 is provided with acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c. As the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c, a left acceleration completion flag 101a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle acceleration completion flag 101b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right acceleration completion flag 101c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. After the rotation of the left reel 32L has started, when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the left acceleration completion flag 101a is set to "1", and the left reel 32L is When the stop is completed, the left acceleration completion flag 101a is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the middle reel 32M has started, when the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the middle acceleration completion flag 101b is set to "1", and the middle reel 32M is set to "1". When the stop of the vehicle is completed, the intermediate acceleration completion flag 101b is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the right reel 32R has started, when the acceleration period of the right reel 32R is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the right acceleration completion flag 101c is set to "1", and the right reel 32R is set to "1". When stopping is completed, the right acceleration completion flag 101c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with valid period flags 102a to 102c. As the validity period flags 102a to 102c, a left validity period flag 102a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle validity period flag 102b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right validity period flag 102c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. If the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L after the left reel 32L has started rotating at a constant speed, the left valid period flag 102a is set to "1", and the left reel 32L is set to "1". When the stop of the reel 32L is completed, the left valid period flag 102a is cleared to "0". When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the middle reel 32M after the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 32M has started, "1" is set in the middle use validity period flag 102b, When the stoppage of the medium reel 32M is completed, the medium validity period flag 102b is cleared to "0". When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the right reel 32R after the constant speed rotation of the right reel 32R has started, the right validity period flag 102c is set to "1", When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right valid period flag 102c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 103a to 103c. As the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c, a left stop instruction flag 103a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle stop instruction flag 103b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop instruction flag 103c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. When the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the operation of the left stop button 42 in a situation where the left-hand valid period flag 102a is set to "1", the left-hand stop occurs. The instruction flag 103a is set to "1", and when the left reel 32L stops, the left stop instruction flag 103a is cleared to "0". When the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the operation of the medium stop button 43 in a situation where the medium validity period flag 102b is set to "1", the medium The middle use stop instruction flag 103b is set to "1", and when the middle reel 32M is completely stopped, the middle use stop instruction flag 103b is cleared to "0". When the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the right stop button 44 being operated in a situation where the right valid period flag 102c is set to "1", the right valid period flag 102c is set to "1". The right stop instruction flag 103c is set to "1", and when the right reel 32R has stopped, the right stop instruction flag 103c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 104a to 104c. As the stop completion flags 104a to 104c, a left stop completion flag 104a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle stop completion flag 104b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop completion flag 104c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. When the stop of the left reel 32L is completed, the left stop completion flag 104a is set to "1", the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and an affirmative determination is made in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When this is done, the left-hand stop completion flag 104a is cleared to "0". When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle stop completion flag 104b is set to "1", and the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When the determination is made, the intermediate use stop completion flag 104b is cleared to "0". When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right stop completion flag 104c is set to "1", the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When the determination is made, the right stop completion flag 104c is cleared to "0".

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether the rotating flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S801). The rotating flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, and is cleared to "0" when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If the rotation flag is not set to "1" (step S801: NO), it is determined whether the rotation start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S802). As already explained, if it is determined in the reel control process (FIG. 23) that the start wait period has elapsed (step S701: YES), the rotation start flag is set to "1" in step S703.

When the rotation start flag is set to "1" (step S802: YES), the acceleration table shown in FIG. 22(a) is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S803). In this case, the acceleration table is read out individually for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed (step S804). In the rotation start process, two-phase excitation is started for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the data set in the initial acceleration order of the acceleration table. Thereafter, the rotation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S805), and the rotation start flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S806).

When the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S801: YES), the target reel counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S807). The target reel counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be executed in steps S808 to S821. When the value of the target reel counter is "1", the left reel 32L is the target for executing the processing from step S808 to step S821, and when the value of the target reel counter is "2", the middle reel 32M is the target for executing the processing from step S808 to step S821. If the right reel 32R is to be executed in the process of S821 and the value of the target reel counter is "3," then the right reel 32R is to be executed in the processes in steps S808 to S821.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the stop completion flags 104a to 104c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S808). If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, this means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value have already been stopped, so the processes of steps S809 to S821 are executed. The process proceeds to step S822 without any exception.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, if the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S809: YES) ), executes the stop control process (step S810), and sets the valid period flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value even though the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c are not set to "1". If "1" is set in 102a to 102c (step S811: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S812). These constant speed control processes and stop control processes will be explained later.

If the valid period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S811: NO), the valid period flags 102a to 102c corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set. It is determined whether the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "1" (step S813). If a negative determination is made in step S813, acceleration control processing is executed (step S814). In the acceleration control process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are accelerated according to the acceleration table shown in FIG. 22(a). In this case, since the acceleration table is read individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, acceleration is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R individually.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter has been completed (step S815). Specifically, it is determined whether the one-phase excitation at the 24th acceleration order in the acceleration table read corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been maintained over two interruptions. If the acceleration has been completed (step S815: YES), the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S816). That is, the process of setting "1" to the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Note that when the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1" and the corresponding validity period flags 102a to 102c are not set to "1", the acceleration of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is Although the cutting has been completed, the sensor cut bun 37 is not detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

If the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1" (step S813: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S817). In the constant speed control process, a one-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). After that, it is determined whether the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S818). When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S818: YES), "1" is set to the valid period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. (Step S819). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are enabled.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation has started is such that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if acceleration control is performed in this way, the difference will depend on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the process of steps S818 and S819, that is, the process of setting the valid period flags 102a to 102c to "1" when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R separately. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

After that, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are already lit (step S820). Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in the off state, the corresponding stop buttons are basically activated at the timing when the valid period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1". 42 to 44 are in an off state. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S820, and the button lighting process is executed (step S821). In the button lighting process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operations are enabled are switched from the off state to the on state in order, making it easier for the player to recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operations are enabled.

On the other hand, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed normally due to step-out or the like, a step-out handling process (step S824) to be described later is executed, so that the reel 32L whose rotation is abnormal is executed. , 32M, and 32R are re-accelerated. In this case, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R will not respond until the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and constant speed rotation is started, and the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not enabled. On the other hand, in the step-out handling process (step S824), which will be described later, a process for turning off the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are subject to reacceleration is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has already been enabled and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in a light emitting state, re-acceleration is performed due to abnormal rotation occurring in the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the lighting state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is maintained even before the operation is activated. Therefore, when the process of step S819 is executed based on such re-acceleration, since the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are already in the lit state, an affirmative determination is made in step S820 and the process is executed in step S821. processing is not executed.

If the valid period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S811: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S812). In the constant speed control process, like the constant speed control process in step S817, one pulse is generated so that one phase excitation and two phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase. As a result, constant speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is maintained in a state in which the operations of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled. If the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated in this situation, a reel stop process is executed in step S712 of the reel control process (FIG. 23), so that a countermeasure can be taken. "1" is set in the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c.

In the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), if the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S809: YES), A stop control process is executed (step S810).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the stop control process.

First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the stop control flag provided in the main side RAM 74 in association with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S901). . The stop control flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and allows the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not stop control has been started for the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. used to do. If the corresponding stop control flag is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), the stop table shown in FIG. 22(b) is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S902). This read stop table is used to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value, and when starting stop control for other reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, The stop table is newly read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74. Thereafter, "1" is set in the stop control flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S903).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, or if the process in step S903 is executed, a stop control execution process is executed (step S904). In the stop control execution process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are stopped according to the stop table shown in FIG. 22(b).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter has been stopped (step S905). Specifically, it is determined whether one-phase excitation, which is the last excitation order, is maintained over 34 interrupts in the stop table read corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the stop is completed (step S905: YES), various flag clearing processes are executed (step S906). In the various flag clearing process, the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c, valid period flags 102a to 102c, stop instruction flags 103a to 103c, and stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to " 0" Clear. Then, the stop completion flags 104a to 104c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S907). As a result, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), by making an affirmative determination in step S808, steps S809 to S821 The process will not be executed.

Thereafter, by determining whether all of the stop completion flags 104a to 104c are set to "1", it is determined whether the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S908). . If a negative determination is made in step S908, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose validity period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1" are switched from the unlit state to the lit state ( Step S909). As already explained, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on at the timing when the operation is enabled, but when the stop control for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the reel control process (FIG. 23) By executing the button light-off process in step S706, even the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are turned off. On the other hand, by executing the button lighting process in step S909, the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and the stop operation of the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. In this case, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose stop operation is enabled can be turned on correspondingly. On the other hand, if the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S908: YES), the rotating flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S910).

Returning to the explanation of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, if the process of step S810 is executed, if the process of step S812 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S815. , if the process of step S816 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S818, if an affirmative determination is made in step S820, or if the process of step S821 is executed, the value of the target reel counter in the main side RAM 74 is set to 1. are added (step S822). If the value of the target reel counter after addition by 1 is 3 or less (step S823: NO), the process returns to step S808. As a result, the processes of steps S808 to S821 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotational control is to be executed in the next order. If the value of the target reel counter after adding 1 is "4" (step S823: YES), step-out handling processing is executed in step S824, and then the present stepping motor control processing is ended.

In the step-out response process, the number of steps measured since the sensor cut bang 37 was last detected by the reel index sensor 36 for each rotating reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is set as a larger number than the number of steps for one revolution. It is determined whether the number of steps is greater than or equal to the reference step number. If the number of steps is equal to or greater than the standard number of steps, there is a high possibility that a rotation abnormality such as step-out has occurred on the reel 32L, 32M, 32R, so the acceleration completion flag corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set. 101a to 101c, valid period flags 102a to 102c, stop instruction flags 103a to 103c, and stop control flags are cleared to "0", and the processes of step S803 and step S804 are executed for the relevant reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and then restarted. Start acceleration. In this case, re-acceleration processing is not executed for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R other than the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which abnormal rotation has been identified. In addition, in the step-out handling process, the process to turn off the lights of the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the re-acceleration process, is not executed. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are in the lit state become targets for re-acceleration, the lit states of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are maintained.

Next, how the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27(a) shows the rotation status of the left reel 32L, and FIG. 27(b) shows the sensor cut van 37 detected by the reel index sensor 36 provided corresponding to the left reel 32L after the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed. FIG. 27(c) shows the state of the left valid period flag 102a, FIG. 27(d) shows the rotation status of the middle reel 32M, and FIG. 27(e) shows the timing of the first detection. This shows the timing at which the sensor cut bang 37 is first detected after the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is completed by the correspondingly provided reel index sensor 36, and FIG. 27(f) shows the state of the middle use validity period flag 102b. , FIG. 27(g) shows the rotation status of the right reel 32R, and FIG. 27(h) shows the sensor cut van 37 detected by the reel index sensor 36 provided corresponding to the right reel 32R when the acceleration of the right reel 32R is completed. 27(i) shows the state of the right validity period flag 102c, and FIG. 27(j) shows the period when at least one stop button 42 to 44 is lit. shows.

At timing t1, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started as shown in FIGS. 27(a), 27(d), and 27(g). In this case, acceleration control based on the acceleration table is executed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, at timing t2, acceleration is completed in each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and constant speed rotation is started. Note that the timing at which acceleration is completed in each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is not limited to the same or substantially the same configuration, and may differ depending on the rotational position when starting acceleration control. It may also be configured to obtain

Thereafter, at timing t3 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L first detects the sensor cut bang 37 as shown in FIG. 27(b). is detected and the rotational position of the left reel 32L becomes the rotational initial position, so that the left valid period flag 102a is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 27(c). As a result, the operation of the left stop button 42 on the left reel 32L is enabled. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27(j), the left stop button 42 is switched from the off state to the on state, thereby notifying the player that the operation of the left stop button 42 is valid. However, the middle stop button 43 and the right stop button 44 are maintained in the off state. Note that if the left stop button 42 is operated between timing t3 and timing t4, the operation of the middle stop button 43 for the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 for the right reel 32R are not enabled. Even if it is, stop control of the left reel 32L is started.

After that, at timing t4, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. 27(h). As a result, the rotational position of the right reel 32R becomes the initial rotational position, and the right validity period flag 102c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 27(i). As a result, the operation of the right stop button 44 on the right reel 32R is enabled. Furthermore, by switching the right stop button 44 from the unlit state to the lit state, the player is notified that the operation of the right stop button 44 is valid. However, the middle stop button 43 is maintained in an unlit state. Note that if the right stop button 44 is operated between timing t4 and timing t5, the right reel 32R will stop even if the operation of the middle stop button 43 for the middle reel 32M is not enabled. Control begins.

After that, at timing t5 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. 27(e). As a result, the rotational position of the middle reel 32M becomes the initial rotational position, and as shown in FIG. 27(f), the middle use validity period flag 102b is set to "1". As a result, the operation of the middle stop button 43 on the middle reel 32M is enabled. Moreover, by switching the middle stop button 43 from the unlit state to the lit state, the player is notified that the operation of the middle stop button 43 is valid.

Thereafter, by operating the left stop button 42, the stop control of the left reel 32L is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 102a is cleared to "0", and furthermore, at timing t7, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped as shown in FIG. 27(a). In this case, since the left reel 32L is controlled to stop between timing t6 and timing t7, the operation of the middle stop button 43 for the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 for the right reel 32R are disabled. . Therefore, from timing t6 to timing t7, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off as shown in FIG. 27(j). Then, by completing the stop control of the left reel 32L at timing t7, the operation of the middle stop button 43 for the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 for the right reel 32R become effective. Further, at the timing t7, the middle stop button 43 and the right stop button 44 are turned on again as shown in FIG. 27(j).

Thereafter, by operating the middle stop button 43, stop control of the middle reel 32M is started at timing t8 as shown in FIG. The flag 102b is cleared to "0", and further, at timing t9, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped as shown in FIG. 27(d). In this case, since the stop control of the middle reel 32M is executed from timing t8 to timing t9, the operation of the right stop button 44 for the right reel 32R is disabled. Therefore, from timing t8 to timing t9, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off as shown in FIG. 27(j). Then, when the stop control of the middle reel 32M is completed at timing t9, the operation of the right stop button 44 for the right reel 32R becomes effective. Further, at the timing t9, the right stop button 44 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 27(j).

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button 44, stop control of the right reel 32R is started as shown in FIG. 27(g) at timing t10, and the right reel validity period is as shown in FIG. The flag 102c is cleared to "0", and furthermore, at timing t11, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 27(g). Further, at timing t10, the right stop button 44 is turned off as shown in FIG. 27(j).

As described above, when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, the process of setting the valid period flags 102a to 102c to "1" is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

Here, in a situation where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, the stopping operation for the left reel 32L is generally performed first. In addition, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, if the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed first, the left stop button 42 is operated at a timing that will not cause a cherry prize to be missed. . As shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement in FIG. 28, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L so as not to miss the cherry prize, the maximum number of slides is 4, so the follow range The third "White 7" symbol to the thirteenth "Watermelon" symbol shown as can reach the lower row of the left reel 32L.

For example, if the left stop button 42 is operated in a situation where the cherry winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and the third "White 7" symbol has reached the lower row of the left reel 32L, the third Any one of the "White 7" symbol to the sixth "Replay" symbol reaches the lower row of the left reel 32L, and the third "White 7" symbol reaches the lower row of the left reel 32L, and the cherry winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. If the left stop button 42 is operated when the lower row of the left reel 32L has been reached, the seventh "bell" symbol will reach the lower row of the left reel 32L. Further, for example, if the left stop button 42 is operated in a situation where the cherry winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 and the ninth "cherry" symbol has reached the lower row of the left reel 32L, 10 Any one of the 13th "BAR" symbol to the 13th "Watermelon" symbol reaches the lower row of the left reel 32L, and the 9th "Cherry" symbol is on the left when the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If the left stop button 42 is operated when the lower row of the reel 32L has been reached, the ninth "cherry" symbol will reach the lower row of the left reel 32L.

In the configuration where the follow range is set as described above, the initial rotational position at which the corresponding reel index sensor 36 detects the sensor cut bang 37 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the reel to which the 15th symbol corresponds. This is a rotational position located at the lower position of 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the left reel 32L, this initial rotation position is the follow range and the non-follow range which is the range outside the follow range (0th "Watermelon" symbol to 2nd "Bell" symbol and 14th "Watermelon" symbol to This is a rotational position that is one symbol further downstream than the boundary with the 20th "bell" symbol on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L.

As already explained, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, when the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed according to the acceleration table shown in FIG. One pulse of excitation signal is output 24 times. Further, each time one pulse of the excitation signal is output, the stepping motor 33 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R advances one step, and the number of steps required to advance one symbol is 24 steps. Therefore, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R advance by one symbol from the time the acceleration control is started to the time it is completed. In this case, the initial rotational position of the left reel 32L is a rotational position advanced by one symbol downstream with respect to the downstream boundary between the follow range and the non-follow range in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L. In other words, the initial rotational position of the left reel 32L is the 15th "Red" symbol, which is two symbols ahead of the 13th "Watermelon" symbol that exists at the downstream end in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L in the follow range. 7" The rotation position is such that the symbol is in the lower position. As a result, if the left stop button 42 for the left reel 32L is operated so that any symbol included in the follow range stops at the lower position of the left reel 32L, when the next game starts, After the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed and the rotation speed is constant, the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L, and the operation of the left stop button 42 is enabled. That will happen. In a configuration in which the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is individually enabled when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after acceleration is completed, the left reel By setting the initial rotational position of the left reel 32L as described above, the operation of the left stop button 42 for the left reel 32L can be made effective at an early stage in a situation where the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed for the first time. It becomes possible.

To explain further, when the left reel 32L starts rotating in a situation where the 14th "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the lower position, the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L is activated by the sensor cut bang 37. Since the acceleration control of the left reel 32L is completed at the timing after the left reel 32L is first detected, the timing at which the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L detects the sensor cut bang 37 after the acceleration control is completed is when the left reel 32L is further The timing has come around. On the other hand, if the rotation of the left reel 32L is started in a situation where any symbol included in the follow range is stopped at the lower position of the left reel 32L, the acceleration control of the left reel 32L is After completion, a timing occurs at which the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L detects the sensor cut bang 37 for the first time.

<Various gaming states>
Next, the corresponding process when the game ends, which is executed in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 29. Note that since the process of step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is executed after the reel control process (step S313), the corresponding process at the end of the game is to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. It will be executed after

First, bonus processing is executed to control the transition and progress of the BB state ST2 (see FIG. 30), the RB state ST3 (see FIG. 30), or the RT state ST4 (see FIG. 30) (step S1001). The bonus processing will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, on the condition that it is not in any of the BB state ST2, RB state ST3, and RT state ST4 (step S1002: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1003). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (see FIG. 30), normal processing is executed (step S1004), and when the gaming state is the AT state ST5 (see FIG. 30), the AT If the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (see FIG. 30), a second control process for the game section is performed (step S1006). Also, when either the normal process in step S1004 or the AT process in step S1005 is executed, the second control process for the game section (step S1006) is executed. The processing contents of steps S1004 to S1006 will be explained in detail later.

If the current gaming state is BB state ST2, RB state ST3, or RT state ST4, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, so that the normal process in step S1004 and the AT process in step S1005 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the BB state ST2, RB state ST3, or RT state ST4, the processing for advancing the normal gaming state ST1 and the processing for advancing the AT state ST5 are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is BB state ST2, RB state ST3, or RT state ST4, the second control process for the gaming section in step S1006 is executed. Therefore, even if the vehicle is in the BB state ST2, RB state ST3, or RT state ST4, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

Next, the game state and game period will be explained. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming states and gaming sections that exist in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has a normal gaming state ST1, a BB state ST2, an RB state ST3, an RT state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6 as gaming states. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not occur overlappingly with each other.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that remains when the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105). Further, when the BB state ST2 or RB state ST3 that occurred in the normal gaming state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal gaming state ST1, the expected net increase value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in one game") is less than 0.

The BB state ST2 is a gaming state to which the player enters when a BB winning is achieved in a situation where BB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Further, the RB state ST3 is a gaming state to which the player enters when an RB winning is achieved in a situation where RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. BB state ST2 and RB state ST3 are the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (from "expected number of gaming media given in one game" to "number of gaming media betted in one game") compared to the non-AT state. This is a gaming state in which the value obtained by subtracting . Furthermore, the BBST2 state and RB state ST3 have a net increase in the expected value of gaming media in one game (from the "expected number of gaming media to be provided in one game") compared to any gaming state other than these BB state ST2 and RB state ST3. This is a gaming state in which the value obtained by subtracting "the number of game media bet on in one game" is high. Specifically, in addition to winning the combination that makes it possible to win the first bell with a higher probability (for example, approximately 1/1.1) than in other gaming states, if you win the winning combination, each Since the first bell prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the game in one game The expected value of net increase in media is 8 or more. The BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3 continue over a plurality of games, and end when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the case of BB state ST2, the end condition is set that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state ST2 is 350 or more, and in the case of RB state ST3. If so, the end condition is set that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is 150 or more.

The RT state ST4 is a gaming state to which the game enters after the BB state ST2 ends. The RT state ST4 is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay winning combination is higher than in other gaming states by referring to the winning combination table shown in FIG. 17 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). . In addition, if a replay winning combination is won, the replay winning will be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, so in RT state ST4, the probability of replay winning is different. This is a gaming state that is higher than the gaming state of. Since the probability of winning a replay prize is set higher than in other gaming states, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game) can be calculated from the expected net increase in gaming media in one game. The value obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media) is greater than 0 and less than 1. The RT state ST4 is the first half RT state that ends when the first half end standard number of games (specifically, "20") is executed or when a normal replay prize is established in a situation where the index value IV=16 is won. Then, in the first half RT state, if a normal replay prize is established before the first half side end standard number of games are executed, the transition will occur and the second half side end standard number of games (specifically "20") will be executed. and a second half RT state that ends with. The end of the second half RT state ends the RT state ST4.

The AT state ST5 is a gaming state that transitions when a transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the normal gaming state ST1. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games and the remaining number of sets of the AT state ST5 becomes "0", and ends when the ending conditions of the second section SC2 are also satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the first bell prize is announced. Furthermore, in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the second bell prize is announced. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is achieved, "15" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") is 1 or more. Become. More specifically, in the AT state ST5, the expected net increase value of game media in one game is 5 or more.

The end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state that is entered when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied. The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game has been executed. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, a transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1. The termination preparation state ST6 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase value of gaming media in one game (value obtained by subtracting "the number of gaming media bet on in one game" from "the expected number of gaming media given in one game") is less than 0. It is.

In the configuration in which various gaming states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a gaming section is set separately from these gaming states ST1 to ST6. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in this slot machine 10, as elements that determine the gaming situation, there are set values of "1" to "6", various gaming states ST1 to ST6, and gaming sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. are doing.

The first section SC1 refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve winnings that are advantageous to the player when winning different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") is 1 or more by being notified of the stop order. This is a section in which a potentially advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue. When the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered and the first section SC1 is entered. Furthermore, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can be started, and is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can continue. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to transition to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs, and the first section SC1 shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the AT state ST5 or end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process moves to the first section SC1. In addition, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 is the maximum number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), and by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1, the limited total net addition number of gaming media reaches the upper limit net addition number (specifically, 2400 pieces). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching the goal is met. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as "the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues (in a situation where no game media are awarded, it is "0"). ”)” minus “the total number of game media used to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed)” is specified. In the case of a difference in the number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference in the number of sheets is taken as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference in the number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

In other words, if the continuation of the second section SC2 causes the restricted total number of net additions of gaming media from the start of the second section SC2 to reach the upper limit net addition number, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. Transition to 1 section SC1. In addition, if the second section SC2 continues and the number of games played from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 starts. Transition. If either one of these ending conditions is satisfied, even if it is in the middle of AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is ended and the second section SC2 is ended in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. The situation shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 in the first section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 30, the player can stay in the normal gaming state ST1, BB state ST2, RB state ST3, and RT state ST4 in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, in the AT state ST5 and the termination preparation state ST6, the vehicle does not stay in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the bonus process is executed in step S1001 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29). As already explained, the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has all stopped in one game, so the bonus process is also executed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. This will be executed after all rotations have been stopped.

If it is not in the RT state ST4 (step S1101: NO) and is neither in the BB state ST2 or RB state ST3 (step S1103: NO), on the condition that the BB winning has been established (step S1104: YES), BB generation processing is executed (step S1105). In the BB generation process, a bonus counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "350", which is the reference number for ending the BB state ST2. Further, the BB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the first half RT flag and the second half RT flag provided in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0". When the BB flag is set to "1", in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is read from the main side ROM 73 and the winning combination lottery is executed. When the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is referred to, the winning combination that makes it possible to win the first bell will be won with a probability of about 1/1.1. If the winning combination is won, the first bell will be won regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish. Furthermore, if the BB flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1103. In addition, in the BB generation process, a BB generation command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the BB generation command, it reads out the data table corresponding to the BB state ST2 from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 and the sound output of the speaker 62 according to the read data table. and executes display control of the image display device 63.

If the state is not RT state ST4 (step S1101: NO), and is neither BB state ST2 nor RT state ST4 (step S1103: NO), on the condition that the RB winning is established (step S1106: YES), RB generation processing is executed (step S1107). In the RB generation process, a bonus counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "150" which is the end reference number of the RB state ST3. Further, the RB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the first half RT flag and second half RT flag provided in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0". When the RB flag is set to "1", in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is read from the main side ROM 73 and the winning combination lottery is executed. When the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is referred to, the winning combination that makes it possible to win the first bell will be won with a probability of approximately 1/1.1. If the winning combination is won, the first bell will be won regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish. Further, if the RB flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1103. Further, in the RB generation process, an RB generation command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the RB generation command, it reads the data table corresponding to the RB state ST3 from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 and the sound output of the speaker 62 according to the read data table. and executes display control of the image display device 63.

If the BB flag or RB flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1103: YES), it means that the current game is a game played in the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3. In this case, it is determined whether or not game media are provided in the current game (step S1108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first bell prize has been achieved. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the number of game media to be awarded this time is subtracted from the value of the bonus counter in the main side RAM 74. In BB state ST2 or RB state ST3, only the first bell prize is awarded as a prize for which game media are awarded, and if the first bell prize occurs, "15" game media are awarded. In step S1109, "15" is subtracted from the value of the bonus counter in the main RAM 74.

If the value of the bonus counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1110: YES), and the BB flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1111: YES), Setting processing is executed (step S1112). In the RT state setting process, the first half RT flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the RT counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "20", which is the first half end reference number. The first half RT flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the first half RT state of the RT state ST4, and the RT counter is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify the trigger for ending the first half RT state and the second half RT state. This is a counter for

If a negative determination is made in step S1111 or if the process in step S1112 is executed, a bonus end process is executed (step S1113). In the bonus end process, the BB flag and the RB flag are cleared to "0". Further, in the bonus end process, a bonus end command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it reads out a data table corresponding to the bonus ending indicating that BB state ST2 or RB state ST3 has ended from the performance-side ROM 93 to the performance-side RAM 94, and displays the upper part according to the read data table. It executes light emission control of the lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. Further, information indicating which of the BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3 has ended is set in the bonus end command. If information indicating that the BB state ST2 has ended is set in the bonus end command, after the performance corresponding to the bonus ending ends, the data table corresponding to the RT state ST4 is transferred from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. According to the read data table, light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 are executed. On the other hand, if information indicating that RB state ST3 has ended is set in the bonus end command, data corresponding to the gaming state before shifting to RB state ST3 after the performance corresponding to the bonus ending ends. The table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 are executed according to the read data table.

In the RT state ST4, specifically, if the first half RT flag or the second half RT flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), RT processing is executed (step S1102). FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the RT processing.

If the first half RT flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether the winning combination has been won with the index value IV=16 in the lottery process (FIG. 15) ( Step S1202). As already explained, the normal replay winning data and the special replay winning data are set in the index value IV=16. If you win with index value IV = 16, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and third and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. Normal replay winnings are guaranteed regardless of timing. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay winning can be achieved regardless of the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the special replay winning cannot be achieved depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing at which a special replay winning is not achieved, a normal replay winning is definitely achieved. In other words, in the case of a win with index value IV=16 and the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, priority is given to establishing a special replay prize, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is To ensure that a normal replay winning is achieved when a special replay winning cannot be achieved due to the following relationship.

If the index value IV=16 is a win (step S1202: YES), it is determined whether a normal replay win has been achieved (step S1203). If the index value IV=16 is not won (step S1202: NO), or if the index value IV=16 is won but a special replay prize is established instead of a normal replay prize (step S1203: NO), the main side RAM 74 The value of the RT counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1204). As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the first half RT state is decreased by one. If the value of the RT counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1205: YES), the first half RT flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1208). In this case, since the second half RT flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1", the RT state ST4 ends only in the first half RT state without transitioning to the second half RT state.

On the other hand, if the index value IV=16 is won and the normal replay prize is established (steps S1202 and S1203: YES), the second half RT flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1206). The second half RT flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the RT state is the second half of the RT state ST4. Thereafter, the RT counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "20", which is the reference number for ending the second half (step S1207), and the first half RT flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1208).

In addition, the first half RT flag is cleared to "0" when 20 games, which is the standard number of games to end the first half, are played without transitioning to the second half RT state, and when the transition to the second half RT state occurs. The first half RT flag is cleared to "0" not only when this happens, but also when BB winning data or RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. In other words, the first half RT state ends even if the BB winning combination or the RB winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) during the first half RT state.

If the second half RT flag is set to "1", this means that the second half RT state is in the RT state ST4, so a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the value of the RT counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the RT counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1210: YES), the second half RT flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1211).

The opportunity for the second half RT flag to be cleared to "0" is not only when 20 games, which are the standard number of games for finishing the second half, have been played, but also when BB winning data or RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. Also, the second half RT flag is cleared to "0". In other words, the second half RT state ends even if the BB winning combination or the RB winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) during the second half RT state.

As described above, in the RT state ST4, the first half RT state is started first. If the index value IV=16 is won in the first half RT state and a normal replay winning is established, the game shifts to the second half RT state. The second half RT state ends when 20 games, which is the second half end standard number of games, are played unless BB winning data or RB winning data is stored. On the other hand, in the first half RT state, if the index value IV = 16 is won and 20 games, which is the standard number of games to end the first half, are played without the event of winning the index value IV = 16 and establishing a normal replay prize, then the first half RT state is The RT state ST4 ends without transitioning to the latter half RT state. Therefore, in the first half RT state, when you have played as many games as possible within the standard number of games at the end of the first half, you can win the index value IV = 16 and establish a normal replay prize, thereby making it possible to win the stay game in RT state ST4. It becomes possible to secure a large number of them.

In this case, if you win with the index value IV = 16 as described above, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each A normal replay prize is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay winning can be achieved regardless of the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the special replay winning cannot be achieved depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing at which a special replay winning is not achieved, a normal replay winning is definitely achieved. In other words, in the case of a win with index value IV=16 and the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, priority is given to establishing a special replay prize, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is To ensure that a normal replay winning is achieved when a special replay winning cannot be achieved due to the following relationship. Therefore, if the index value IV = 16 is won at an early timing in the first half RT state, the first half RT state is continued by operating each stop button 42 to 44 so as to establish a special replay winning, and the first half RT state is continued. It is preferable to operate each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 so as to establish a normal replay winning when the index value IV=16 is won at the stage when the remaining standard number of games for ending the first half is reduced. Under these circumstances, in this slot machine 10, if the index value IV=16 is won in the first half RT state, this fact is announced before the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped. . In addition, if the remaining standard number of games at the end of the first half in the first half RT state are within the avoidance game number range (specifically 8 to 20 games), a special replay prize will be established if the index value IV = 16 is won. If the notification of the stop order prompting is executed, and the remaining first half end standard number of games in the first half RT state is within the number of successful games (specifically 7 games or less), the index value IV = 16 is won. In this case, a notification of the stop order is executed to encourage the establishment of a normal replay winning.

Control for executing notification of the stop order as described above is executed in the stop order notification control process (step S512) of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 72. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process.

If the first half RT flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES) and the index value IV=16 is won (step S1302: YES), the RT counter of the main side RAM 74 is It is determined whether the value is 8 or more (step S1303). If the value of the RT counter is within the avoidance game number range (specifically, 8 to 20 games) (step S1303: YES), a stop order setting process for reverse push notification is executed (step S1304). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary starts on the dual-purpose display section 66. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. Thereafter, a reverse push notification command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1305). When the production side MPU 92 receives the reverse push notification command, it causes the image display device 63 to start displaying a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

34(a) to 34(c) show the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the reverse push notification when the above-mentioned reverse push notification is executed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stopping mode of 32R. When the player who has confirmed the reverse push notification makes the first stop of the right reel 32R and the second stop of the middle reel 32M, the stopping mode will be as shown in FIG. 34(a). In this case, the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R on the third main line ML3 become "replay" symbols. This stopping mode is a stopping mode in which both a normal replay winning and a special replay winning can be realized.

When stopping the left reel 32L in the situation shown in FIG. 34(a), if the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing when the sixth "replay" symbol is present at the bottom of the left reel 32L, As shown in (b), the stop control of the left reel 32L is executed in such a manner that a special replay winning is achieved on the third main line ML3. As a result, a special replay prize is established. When the special replay prize is established, transition to the second half RT state is avoided, and the first half RT state is continued. On the other hand, when stopping the left reel 32L in the situation shown in FIG. 34(a), the left stop button 42 is operated at a timing when a symbol other than the 6th "replay" symbol exists in the lower row of the left reel 32L. In this case, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the stop control of the left reel 32L is executed in such a manner that a normal replay win is established on the third main line ML3. As a result, the normal replay winning is established and the game shifts to the second half RT state.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the value of the RT counter is within the range of the number of successful games (specifically, 7 games or less) (step S1303: NO), the stop order setting for press order notification is performed. Processing is executed (step S1306). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary starts on the dual-purpose display section 66. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. Thereafter, a forward press notification command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1307). When the production side MPU 92 receives the order push notification command, it causes the image display device 63 to start displaying a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the sequential push notification, a normal line is displayed on the third main line ML3 as shown in FIG. Stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in such a manner that a replay winning is achieved. As a result, the normal replay winning is established and the game shifts to the second half RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, if the process of step S1305 is executed, or if the process of step S1307 is executed, another stop order notification process is executed (step S1308). In other stop order notification processing, for example, in the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery processing (Fig. 15), the first bell prize is A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the prize is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to make the first bell win. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the order on the image display device 63. For example, in the case of AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the reel 32L enables the establishment of the second bell prize. , 32M, and 32R are displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the image display device 63 displays the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the second bell. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 for making the notification.

In the first half RT state of RT state ST4, as mentioned above, if a winning is achieved with index value IV = 16 and a normal replay winning is achieved, a transition to the second half RT state occurs, while if a winning is achieved with index value IV = 16. In this case, if a special replay winning is achieved, the transition to the second half RT state is avoided.In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol and the symbol on the middle reel 32M is When the stopped symbol is a "replay" symbol and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a special replay prize is awarded. In addition, in order to make a special replay win, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and also operate the left stop button 42 at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when a special replay winning is achieved, the player recognizes that the replay winning has actually been achieved, but the player has made a so-called replay failure. In this case, when a special replay winning is achieved, the execution mode of the predetermined notification is the same as when the replay winning is not achieved. The execution mode of the predetermined notification will be described below.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a setting process executed by the main MPU 72 at the end of the game. Note that the setting process at the end of the game is executed in step S319 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The process of step S319 is a process that is executed when one game ends.

If any replay winning is achieved in this game (step S1401: YES), the condition is that the current gaming state is the first half RT state and a special replay winning is achieved in this game (step S1402). and step S1403: YES), the lighting process of the credit input button 47 is executed (step S1404). As a result, the credit input button 47 changes from the off state to the on state. However, since the special replay winning has been achieved, even if the current game ends, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is maintained at "3" which is the upper limit number of bets. Therefore, even if the credit input button 47 is turned on, it is not possible to place a new bet on game media.

Thereafter, the pseudo bet corresponding flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1405). The pseudo bet corresponding flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the situation is after the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state. In addition, a bet lights out command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1406). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bet lights-off command, it turns off each light emitting section 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, if a negative determination is made in step S1403, or if the process in step S1406 is executed, the replay bet setting flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1407 ). That is, when any replay winning is achieved, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is maintained as it is, and the bet setting completion flag at the time of replay is set to "1". As a result, if any replay winning is achieved, it becomes possible to start a new game without requiring a new bet on game media.

If no replay prize is established in the current game (step S1401: NO), the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" (step S1408). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the current number of bets in the main side MPU 72, and the main side bet display section 64 displays a value corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control process of the bet display section. Note that the bet display unit control process is executed in step S212 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "0" (step S1501: YES), all lights-out processing is executed (step S1502). By executing the all-lights-off process, all three light-emitting parts 64a to 64c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the bet display section 64 are turned off.

If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "1" (step S1503: YES), the first lighting process is executed (step S1504). By executing the first lighting process, the lowest light emitting part 64a among the three light emitting parts 64a to 64c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the bet display section 64 is turned on, and the remaining light emitting parts 64b and 64c is turned off.

If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S1505: YES), a second lighting process is executed (step S1506). By executing the second lighting process, among the three light emitting parts 64a to 64c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the bet display section 64, the lowermost and center light emitting parts 64a and 64b are turned on, respectively, and the lowest light emitting parts 64a and 64b are turned on. The upper light emitting section 64c is turned off.

If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S1505: NO), a third lighting process is executed (step S1507). By executing the third lighting process, all three light emitting parts 64a to 64c arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the bet display section 64 are turned on.

As described above, if any replay winning is achieved, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is maintained even if a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state. Therefore, in the bet display section 64, all three light emitting sections 64a to 64c are maintained in a lit state. However, this is not limited to this, and if any replay winning is achieved, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the bet display part 64 are temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). A configuration may also be adopted in which all the light emitting sections 64a to 64c are set to the light emitting state again later, regardless of the operation by the player.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process at the end of the game (FIG. 35), after executing the process of step S1408, a bet lights out command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1409). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bet lights-off command, it turns off each light emitting section 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69. As a result, in a game in which a replay winning is not achieved, not only all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 are turned off when the game ends, but also all the light emitting sections 64a to 64c of the production side bet display section 69 are turned off. The light emitting parts 69a to 69c are turned off.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1410: YES), the process of lighting up the credit input button 47 is executed (step S1411). As a result, the credit input button 47 changes from the off state to the on state, and the player is notified that it is possible to bet on virtual medals.

Next, the pseudo bet handling process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. Note that the pseudo bet handling process is executed in step S421 of the start waiting process (FIG. 14).

First, it is determined whether the pseudo bet support flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1601). As already explained, the pseudo bet support flag is set to "1" when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state. If the pseudo bet support flag is set to "1" (step S1601: YES), a pseudo bet support command is sent to the production side MPU 92 on the condition that the credit input button 47 is operated (step S1602: YES). (Step S1603). When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bet corresponding command, it sets each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 into a light emitting state and causes the speaker 62 to output the corresponding sound.

Thereafter, the pseudo bet corresponding flag is cleared to "0" (step S1604). Further, the process of turning off the credit input button 47 is executed (step S1605). As a result, the credit input button 47 changes from a lit state to an unlit state.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the bet notification control process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the bet notification control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether a bet setting command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1701). As already explained, the bet setting command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a increases based on medals being inserted into the medal slot 45 or the credit input button 47 being operated. . The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after the bet number has increased.

If a bet setting command has been received (step S1701: YES), read processing of staged light emission data at the time of bet setting is executed (step S1702). In the reading process, all of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 that correspond to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a included in the bet setting command received this time are turned on. The light emission data is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. In this case, the light emitting units 69a to 69c that are already in the lit state are maintained in the lit state, and the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to the newly increased number of bets are changed from the unlit state to the lit state. Read out. In addition, when the number of bets of 2 or more increases, the light emitting data is set so that the light emitting parts 69a to 69c corresponding to the smaller number of bets are sequentially turned on at a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second). Read out. The performance side MPU 92 performs light emission control corresponding to the light emission data on each of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 in a light emission control process.

Note that the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a lighting counter that is referred to by the performance side MPU 92 to specify the type of the light emitting units 69a to 69c that are already in the lighting state. When the value of the lit counter is "0", this corresponds to all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 being in the off state, and the value of the lit counter is "1". In this case, only the light-emitting section 69a of the production-side bet display section 69 is lit, and if the value of the lit counter is "2", the light-emission section 69a of the production-side bet display section 69 is lit. This corresponds to only the light emitting section 69b being lit, and if the value of the lit counter is "3", all the light emitting sections 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 are lit. It corresponds to When any one of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 is lit, the value of the lit counter is updated accordingly.

Thereafter, a process for reading sound output data at the time of bet setting is executed (step S1703). In the reading process, sound output data is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 so that the bet sound corresponding to the increased number of bets is output from the speaker 62. The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control on the speaker 62 corresponding to the sound output data in the sound output control process.

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether a settlement command or a bet light-off command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1704). As already explained, the settlement command is sent from the main MPU 72 when the settlement process is executed. As already explained, the bet light-off command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 at the end of the game in which no replay winning was achieved, and is also transmitted from the main side MPU 72 at the end of the game in which the special replay winning was achieved in the first half RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, a process of turning off the bet light emitting unit is executed (step S1705). In the lights-off process, all the light-emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance-side bet display section 69 are turned off. Also, the value of the lighting counter in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether a pseudo bet corresponding command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1706). As already explained, the pseudo bet corresponding command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the credit input button 47 is operated after the game in which the special replay prize is achieved in the first half RT state is completed.

If a pseudo bet corresponding command has been received (step S1706: YES), read processing of staged light emission data at the time of bet setting is executed (step S1707). In the reading process, light emission data for switching all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 from the off state to the on state is read from the performance side ROM93 to the performance side RAM94. In this case, light emitting data for turning on the light emitting parts 69a to 69c corresponding to the smaller number of bets is read out sequentially at a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second) from the light emitting parts 69a to 69c corresponding to the smaller number of bets. The performance side MPU 92 performs light emission control corresponding to the light emission data on each of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 in a light emission control process. Further, "3" is set in the lighting counter of the performance side RAM 94. Thereafter, a process for reading sound output data when setting a bet is executed (step S1708). In the reading process, sound output data is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 so that a bet sound corresponding to the increase in the number of bets by "3" is output from the speaker 62. The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control on the speaker 62 corresponding to the sound output data in the sound output control process.

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1709). The game start command is transmitted in step S513 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) when a new game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. If a game start command has been received (step S1709: YES), by determining whether the value of the lit counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "3", all the lights in the performance side bet display section 69 are turned off. It is determined whether the sections 69a to 69c are already lit (step S1710). As already explained, the game is started on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is the maximum number of bets, so basically, the value of the lit counter of the production side RAM 94 is "3". A game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in a certain situation. However, if the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit input button 47 after a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, the value of the lit counter in the production side RAM 94 will not be "3". A game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in a situation where the value is "0". In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1710, and a process for reading simultaneous light emission data of the bet light emitting unit is executed (step S1711).

In the reading process, simultaneous light emission data for switching all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 from the off state to the on state is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. In this case, all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c are turned on at the same time, instead of being turned on sequentially at a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second) starting from the light emitting parts 69a to 69c corresponding to the smaller number of bets. Read out the light emission data to do this. The performance side MPU 92 performs light emission control corresponding to the light emission data on each of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 in a light emission control process. Further, "3" is set in the lighting counter of the performance side RAM 94. Note that if a negative determination is made in step S1710, the process of reading sound output data at the time of bet setting is not executed. Therefore, when all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 are turned on at the same time, the sound output of the corresponding bet sound is not performed.

Next, the manner in which bet notification is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 39. 39(a) shows the period during which one game is being executed, FIG. 39(b) shows the timing when the credit input button 47 is operated, and FIG. 39(c) shows the timing when the start lever 41 is operated. 39(d) shows the state of each light emitting part 64a to 64c of the main side bet display part 64, FIG. 39(e) shows the state of each light emitting part 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display part 69, FIG. 39(f) shows the output timing of the bet sound, FIG. 39(g) shows the timing when the normal replay winning is achieved, and FIG. 39(h) shows the timing when the special replay winning is achieved.

By operating the credit input button 47 as shown in FIG. 39(b) at timing t1, each light emitting section 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 changes to the light emitting section 64a as shown in FIG. 39(d). →The light emitting unit 64b→the light emitting unit 64c is sequentially switched from the off state to the on state, and as shown in FIG. The light-emitting section 69b→the light-emitting section 69c is sequentially switched from the unlit state to the on state. Then, at timing t2, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display part 64 are turned on, and all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 are turned on. The lighting state of the main side bet display section 64 and the lighting state of the performance side bet display section 69 are maintained until an opportunity to turn off the lights occurs when the game ends. Further, a bet sound is output from the speaker 62 as shown in FIG. 39(f) from timing t1 to timing t2. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of bets has reached the upper limit number of bets. Note that when the number of bets reaches the upper limit number of bets, the credit input button 47 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39(c), thereby starting the game as shown in FIG. 39(a). The game ends at timing t4. No replay prizes will be awarded in this game. Therefore, at the timing t4 when the game ends, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 simultaneously turn off from the lit state as shown in FIG. 39(d), and as shown in FIG. 39(e) As shown in FIG. 3, all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 simultaneously change from the lighted state to the lighted out state. Note that if the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit input button 47 is switched from the unlit state to the lit state at the timing t4.

Thereafter, by operating the credit input button 47 as shown in FIG. 39(b) at timing t5, each light emitting section 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 emits light as shown in FIG. 39(d). The light-emitting portion 64a → the light-emitting portion 64b → the light-emitting portion 64c is sequentially switched from the off state to the light-on state, and as shown in FIG. The light-off state is sequentially switched from the light-off state to the light-on state in the order of 69a→light-emitting portion 69b→light-emitting portion 69c. Then, at timing t6, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display part 64 are turned on, and all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 are turned on. Further, a bet sound is output from the speaker 62 as shown in FIG. 39(f) from timing t5 to timing t6. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of bets has reached the upper limit number of bets. Note that when the number of bets reaches the upper limit number of bets, the credit input button 47 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state.

Thereafter, at timing t7, the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39(c), thereby starting the game as shown in FIG. 39(a). The game ends at timing t8. In this game, a normal replay prize is established as shown in FIG. 39(g). If a normal replay win is established, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main side RAM 74 is maintained, so that the next game can be started without making a new bet setting. Therefore, even if the current game ends, the lighting state of each of the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 is maintained as shown in FIG. The lighting state of each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 is maintained. Further, the credit input button 47 is maintained in an off state.

Thereafter, at timing t9, the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39(c), thereby starting the game as shown in FIG. 39(a). The game ends at timing t10. In this game, a special replay prize is established as shown in FIG. 39(h). Furthermore, the current gaming state is the first half RT state. If a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is maintained, so the lighting state of the main side bet display section 64 is maintained as shown in FIG. 39(d). However, as shown in FIG. 39(e), all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 are turned off. Moreover, regardless of whether the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit input button 47 is switched from the off state to the on state. In addition, when a special replay winning is achieved in a gaming state other than the first half RT state, the performance side bet display section 69 is maintained in a lit state in the same way as the main side bet display section 64, and the credit input button 47 is maintained in an unlit state. be done.

Thereafter, by operating the credit input button 47 as shown in FIG. 39(b) at timing t11, each light emitting section 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 emits light as shown in FIG. 39(e). The light-off state is sequentially switched from the light-off state to the light-on state in the order of the section 69a→light-emitting section 69b→light-emitting section 69c. Then, at timing t12, all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 are turned on. Note that the main side bet display section 64 is maintained in a lit state. Further, a bet sound is output from the speaker 62 as shown in FIG. 39(f) from timing t11 to timing t12. Further, at timing t11, the credit input button 47 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state.

Thereafter, at timing t13, the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39(c), thereby starting the game as shown in FIG. 39(a). The game ends at timing t14. In this game, a special replay prize is established as shown in FIG. 39(h). Furthermore, the current gaming state is the first half RT state. If a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is maintained, so the lighting state of the main side bet display section 64 is maintained as shown in FIG. 39(d). However, as shown in FIG. 39(e), all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 are turned off. Moreover, regardless of whether the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit input button 47 is switched from the off state to the on state.

Thereafter, at timing t15, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39(c) without operating the credit input button 47, as shown in FIG. 39(a). The game begins as shown in . At the timing t15, the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state, as shown in FIG. 39(e). Note that the main side bet display section 64 is maintained in a lit state. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39(f), no bet sound is output this time. The game ends at timing t16. No replay prizes will be awarded in this game. Therefore, at the timing t16 when the game ends, all the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 simultaneously turn off from the lit state as shown in FIG. 39(d), and as shown in FIG. 39(e) As shown in FIG. 3, all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 simultaneously change from the lighted state to the lighted out state. It should be noted that if the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit input button 47 is switched from the off state to the on state at timing t16.

As described above, when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, even if a new game can be started without setting a new bet, each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69a of the performance side bet display section 69 69c changes from a lit state to an unlit state. When the credit input button 47 is operated, the light emitting sections 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 sequentially turn from the off state to the on state even if a new bet has not been set. . In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, This will be a special replay prize. In addition, in order to make a special replay win, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and also operate the left stop button 42 at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when a special replay winning is achieved, the player recognizes that the replay winning has actually been achieved, but the player has made a so-called replay failure. In this case, if the special replay winning is achieved as described above, each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 is temporarily switched from the lit state to the off state, and then when the credit input button 47 is operated. By sequentially switching each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 from an off state to a lit state, a so-called replay can be removed even when a replay winning has actually been achieved. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that.

When a special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, not only the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 are turned off, but also the credit input button 47 is switched from the turned off state to the lit state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay failure has occurred even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved.

When a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state and the credit input button 47 is operated after that, each light emitting section 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 is sequentially switched from the off state to the on state. Not only is the bet changed, but also a bet sound is output from the speaker 62. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay failure has occurred even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved.

If a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state and the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit input button 47, when the game is started based on this operation, the production side bet display section 69 All of the light emitting sections 69a to 69c are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay has been omitted even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved as described above. All the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the bet display part 69 can be turned on.

In the configuration in which the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 are turned off when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting sections 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 is turned on. will be maintained. As a result, even if the situation is after a special replay winning has been achieved in the first half RT state, the administrator of the game hall can check the main side bet display section 64 and know that a bet on game media is being made. It becomes possible to clearly identify whether or not there is one.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S511, which is a process executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed in the winning lottery process (FIG. 15).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2. , and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), the processes from step S1802 onwards are not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the lottery process for the number of canceled games in step S1804 and the transition lottery process in step S1806 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) for the current winning combination (step S1801: NO). S1802). If the current winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is a loss (step S1802: NO), the processes of steps S1803 to S1809 are not executed. As a result, even if the winning combination is in the first section SC1, if it is a loss in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the processing for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S1803 and the number of canceled games in step S1804 are performed. The lottery process in step S1806 and the transition mode lottery process in step S1806 will not be executed. However, if the lottery result in the winning combination (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1 results in a loss, a non-transfer handling process is executed (step S1810). The non-migration compatible processing will be explained later.

If any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) for the current winning combination (step S1802: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is The number of consecutive games counter 74c (see FIG. 10) and the number of total wins counter 74d (see FIG. 10) provided in the ``games continued'' counter 74c (see FIG. 10) are each cleared to "0" (step S1803). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number of consecutive games counter 74c is used to specify, in the main MPU 72, the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. is the counter. If the value of the number of consecutive games counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second period SC2, even if it is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the number of consecutive games counter 74c is Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal gaming state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d indicates to the main MPU 72 the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. This counter is used to identify the As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as "the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second period SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded is The total number of game media consumed to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where the game is not being executed) to "0" in a situation where the game is not being executed. '' is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value. In the second section SC2, when the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 coins), even if it is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the game in which the reached value is Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal gaming state ST1.

Thereafter, a lottery process for determining the number of games to be released is executed (step S1804). The number of games to be released is the number of games required before the transition to AT state ST5 occurs when the transition to AT state ST5 is not won in the direct lottery process (step S2006) and transition lottery process (step S2011), which will be described later. It is a number. In the lottery process for the number of canceled games, first, a lottery table for the number of canceled games stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. Then, the number of games to be canceled is selected by comparing the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table for the number of games to be canceled. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of games to be released. Furthermore, the selection probabilities for each number of canceled games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is high, or the configuration may be set such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set to be high. A configuration may also be used. After executing the lottery process for the number of canceled games, the number of canceled games selected in the lottery process for the number of canceled games is set in the number of canceled games counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1805). The canceled game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of canceled games.

Thereafter, a transition mode lottery process is executed (step S1806). The transition mode is a mode for distinguishing the expected value that will result in a transition to AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) to be described later. Multiple types of transition modes are set; specifically, the first transition mode has the lowest expected value for winning the transition to AT state ST5, and the first transition mode has an intermediate expected value for winning the transition to AT state ST5. There are two transition modes: the second transition mode, and the third transition mode, which has the highest expected value of winning the transition to the AT state ST5. In the transition mode lottery process, first, the transition mode lottery table stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74. Then, the transition mode is selected by comparing the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the transition mode lottery table. In this case, the selection probabilities for each transition mode are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability that the first transition mode is selected is high, or a configuration in which the probability that the third transition mode is selected is set to be high. . After executing the transition mode lottery process, information corresponding to the type of transition mode selected in the lottery process is stored in the transition mode storage area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1807).

Thereafter, a lighting process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S1808). In the lighting process for the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the section display section 67 starts notifying that it is the second section SC2. Thereafter, a section transition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1809). By receiving the section transition command, the production side MPU 92 starts a production corresponding to the transition of the game section to the second section SC2. Furthermore, the section transition command includes information on the number of canceled games set in the canceled game number counter in step S1805, and information corresponding to the type of transition mode set in the transition mode storage area in step S1807. ing.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The second control process for the game section is executed in step S1006 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped, so the second control process in the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. is executed after all have stopped.

If the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), by checking the state of the flag of the main side RAM 74, It is determined whether the gaming state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S1902). As already explained, the end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state to which the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1903). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6. In the AT processing (step S1005) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 29), a flag is set to enter the end preparation state ST6 when the AT state ST5 ends, and the end preparation completion flag is set to "0". ” will be cleared.

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1904), and then the processing from step S1905 onwards is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if staying in the AT state ST5, a counter for storing the remaining number of consecutive games in the AT state ST5 and a counter for storing the remaining number of sets are used. By clearing various data indicating that the AT state ST5 is included, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. Note that even in the middle of BB state ST2, RB state ST3, and RT state ST4, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of second section SC2. And RT state ST4 continues as it is without being terminated.

Thereafter, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1915). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1916). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the completion of the second section SC2 to be executed.

If it is not in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S1902: NO) or if the process of step S1904 is executed, the value of the number of continuous games counter 74c in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c tells the main MPU 72 the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for specifying.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games, 1500 (step S1906). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 are as described above. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), a replay prize of any of the first chance replay prize, second chance replay prize, normal replay prize, and special replay prize will be won in the current game. It is determined whether or not the following holds true (step S1907). In this case, regardless of whether the current game is in any of the normal gaming state ST1, BB state ST2, RB state ST3, RT state ST4, or AT state ST5, it is subject to the determination in step S1907.

If no replay prize has been won (step S1907: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the number of bets setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d in the main side RAM 74 (step S1908). . In this case, even if a replay prize was established in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to replaying due to the establishment of the replay prize, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the number of bets setting counter 74a) ) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d calculates the limited net increase in the total number of gaming media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in gaming media refers to the total number of gaming media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of gaming media awarded is The total number of game media consumed to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed) from “0” in a situation where the game is not being executed '' is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any of the minor prizes for which game media will be awarded (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize) A determination is made as to whether or not a prize (win prize or cherry prize win) has been established (step S1909). In this case, regardless of whether the current game is in any of the normal gaming state ST1, BB state ST2, RB state ST3, RT state ST4, or AT state ST5, it is subject to the determination in step S1909. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total acquisition counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 (step S1910).

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, or if the process in step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, in step S1908, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d, so for example, any small winning combination is achieved in the game in the normal gaming state ST1 immediately after moving to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, the "total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where no game media is given)" to "the total number of game media awarded in the second section SC2" If the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of gaming media used to execute the game in a situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed), Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media, which is the number of increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, or if the process of step S1912 is executed, whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number. (Step S1913). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 are as described above. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

Here, if any replay winning is established, an affirmative determination is made in step S1907 and the processes of steps S1908 to S1912 are not executed. In a game where a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game is used to set bets, but as a profit from the replay win, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game where the replay win was achieved is It becomes possible to replay a new game depending on the number of bets. In other words, in a game in which a replay prize is achieved, the number of game media owned by the player does not change. In this case, by not executing the processes from step S1908 to step S1912 in a game in which a replay prize is achieved, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It becomes possible to omit the execution of processing for changing the , and it becomes possible to omit the execution of wasteful processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay prize has been won, it is determined in step S1913 whether the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning was established, due to noise etc. Even if the initialization process of section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in subsequent games in which replay winnings were achieved. This makes it possible to perform the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, ending handling processing is executed (step S1917). The ending handling process will be explained later.

<About normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal gaming state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is performed after the determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and includes the first control process of the game section (step S511) and the stop order notification control process (step S512). It is executed in step S510, which is a process executed before.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and the second section flag may be set to "1". This is the second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2001: NO), the processes from step S2002 onwards are not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the process for shifting the gaming state to the AT state ST5 will not be executed.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2001: YES), and if the current gaming state is AT state ST5 (step S2002: YES), execute the AT state processing at the start of the game. (Step S2003). The AT state processing at the start of the game will be explained later.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2001: YES) and the gaming state is not in the AT state ST5 (step S2002: NO), the second transition provided in the main side RAM 74 It is determined whether the confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2004). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the AT state ST5 has already been won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) to be described later. If the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2004: YES), the processes after step S2005 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the transition to the AT state ST5 has already been determined, the processing for transitioning the gaming state to the AT state ST5 after step S2005 will not be executed.

If the second shift confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2004: NO), it is determined whether winning data for direct hits is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S2005). The winning data for direct hits is cherry winning data. In other words, in the case where a winning result is achieved with index value IV=13, 18, or 20 in the winning combination processing (FIG. 15) in the current game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2007. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S2006). In the direct lottery process, the table for direct lottery provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 at the end of the current game. To be determined by lottery. The probability of a direct win in the direct lottery process is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the probability of a direct win is 25%.

If a direct win is achieved in the direct lottery process (step S2007: YES), the first transfer confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2008). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that a direct win has been achieved. After that, a direct hit command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the direct hit command, it sets the execution mode of the performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the direct hit winning. By checking the performance, the player can understand that the game will move to the AT state ST5 triggered by a direct win.

If a negative determination is made in step S2005 or a negative determination is made in step S2007, the winning result will be won with index value IV = 10 to 15 or 18 to 21 in the lottery process for the winning combination in this game (FIG. 15). It is determined whether or not (step S2010). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, a transition lottery process is executed (step S2011).

In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 by lottery. In this case, the transition lottery table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the type of transition mode. That is, a first transition lottery table corresponding to the first transition mode, a second transition lottery table corresponding to the second transition mode, and a third transition lottery table corresponding to the third transition mode are provided. There is. When it is the first transition mode and the first transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation level of winning the transition to AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 20%. In the first transition lottery table, among the index values IV=10 to 15 and 18 to 21, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the probability of winning in AT state ST5. is set high. When it is the second transition mode and the second transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation level of winning the transition to AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 40%. In the second transition lottery table, among the index values IV=10 to 15 and 18 to 21, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the probability of transition winning in AT state ST5. is set high. When it is the third transition mode and the third transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation level of winning the transition to AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 60%. The third transition lottery table shows that among index values IV=10 to 15 and 18 to 21, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the probability of transition winning in AT state ST5. is set high.

If the AT state ST5 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2012: YES), the second transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2013). As already explained, the second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to AT state ST5 has already been won in the transition lottery process (step S2011). Further, a value corresponding to the number of games waiting for transition (specifically, 5 games) is set in a transition waiting counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S2014). The transfer standby counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transfer standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed since the second transfer confirmation flag is set to "1". By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2011), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also a value corresponding to the number of transition waiting games is set in the transition waiting counter. Each time one game is played in a situation where the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1. Then, when the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in a situation where the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the gaming state shifts to the AT state ST5. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2011), the transition standby game number is exhausted, and a transition to the AT state ST5 occurs.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. The normal process is executed in step S1004 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29). As mentioned above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped, so the normal processing also occurs when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped. executed later. As already explained, in the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 29), if the BB state ST2, RB state ST3, or RT state ST4 is present, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, and the normal processing (step S1004) is performed. is not executed.

If the second section flag in the main side RAM74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2101: YES), the first transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM74 is set to "1". It is determined whether it is set (step S2102). If the direct winning lottery process (step S2006) executed at the start of the current game results in a direct winning, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1".

If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2102: YES), a process for transitioning to the AT state ST5 is executed based on the direct win. Specifically, first, a set number counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "3" as the initial set number at the time of a direct hit (step S2103). The set number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. When the number of remaining consecutive games becomes "0" in AT state ST5, one set of AT state ST5 ends. In this case, if the value of the set number counter is 1 or more, a predetermined number of games is newly set as the remaining number of consecutive games and a new set is started, and if the value of the set number counter is "0", a new set is started. AT state ST5 ends.

Thereafter, the AT continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "100" as the initial number of games at the time of direct hit (step S2104). The AT continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining continuation games in one set being executed in the AT state ST5. Thereafter, the AT status flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2105). The AT state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the AT state is ST5. Thereafter, an AT transition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2106). When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it makes the performance execution mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 become the execution mode corresponding to the AT state ST5. Thereafter, the first output start flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2107). The first output start flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output corresponding to the start of AT state ST5 is to be executed. Note that when the process of step S2107 is executed, the first transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0".

If the first transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2102: NO), it is determined whether the second transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2108). As already explained, the second transfer confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transfer has been won in the transfer lottery process (step S2011).

If the second migration confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2108: YES), the value of the migration standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2109). As already explained, the transfer standby counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transfer standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed after the second transfer confirmation flag is set to "1". It is. If the value of the transition standby counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S2110: YES), a process for transitioning to the AT state ST5 at the time of a non-direct hit is executed. Furthermore, if the second transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2108: NO), the value of the number of canceled games counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111), and the number of canceled games after the 1 subtraction is Even when the value of the counter is "0" (step S2112: YES), processing for transitioning to the AT state ST5 in the event of a non-direct hit is executed.

In the process for transitioning to the AT state ST5 at the time of a non-direct hit, first, a lottery process for the number of sets is executed (step S2113). In the set number lottery process, the set number of times in AT state ST5 is determined by lottery using a set number lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. The number of sets to be drawn is 1, 2, and 3, and in the case of the first transition mode, the expected value of the number of sets selected is 1.2, and in the case of the second transition mode In the case of the third transition mode, the expected value of the number of sets to be selected is 1.8 times, and in the case of the third transition mode, the expected value of the number of sets to be selected is 2.4 times. Then, the set number selected in the set number lottery process (step S2113) is set in the set number counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S2114).

Thereafter, the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "50" as the number of normal initial games (step S2115). Further, the AT state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2116). Further, an AT transition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2117). When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it makes the performance execution mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 become the execution mode corresponding to the AT state ST5. Thereafter, the first output start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2118). Note that when the process of step S2118 is executed, the second transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0".

<About AT state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in AT state ST5 will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S2003 in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game (FIG. 42).

First, by determining whether the value of the additional period counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, it is determined whether the current state is the additional period in AT state ST5 (step S2201). The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is the add-on period and the remaining number of consecutive games in the add-on period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, additional period processing is executed (step S2215). The additional period processing will be explained later.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S2201: NO), in the lottery process for the winning combination in the current game (FIG. 15), the index value IV = 10 to 15 or 18 to 21. On the condition that the lottery has been won (step S2202: YES), a transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S2203). In the additional period transition lottery process, the additional period transition lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter updated regularly in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine the remaining number of consecutive games in the AT state ST5. A lottery will be used to determine whether or not to move to an additional period in which the occurrence of such events is more likely to occur. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the probability of winning during the transition period.

If the transition to the additional period is won (step S2204: YES), an addition process for the number of consecutive games is executed (step S2205). In the process of adding the number of consecutive games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of consecutive games for which the additional period continues is added to the value of the AT continuation counter in the main side RAM 74. Specifically, the additional period continues for 10 games, and in step S2205, 20 games, which is the number of games greater than or equal to the 10 games, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter in the main side RAM 74. This makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of consecutive games in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the add-on period. After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2206). The first addition command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that an addition to the number of games has occurred upon transition to the addition period. Furthermore, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games subject to addition this time. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a production indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred when transitioning to the addition period. do. Thereafter, the additional winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2207). The additional winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the winning period has been won in the additional period transition lottery process (step S2203).

If the bonus period transition lottery process (step S2203) does not result in a win for the transition to the bonus period (step S2204: NO), the winner wins with index value IV=10 in the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 15). It is determined whether or not (step S2208). As already explained, the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set in the index value IV=10. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, an addition process of the number of sets is executed (step S2209). Specifically, "3" is added to the number of sets counter in the main side RAM 74 as the number of sets when winning a rare combination. In other words, if the index value IV=10 with the lowest winning probability is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in AT state ST5, the number of remaining sets in AT state ST5 will definitely increase, and The number of increases is "3", which is the same number as the initial set number at the time of direct hit. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV=10, which has the lowest probability of winning, in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the AT state ST5.

After that, a second addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2210). The second addition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an addition to the remaining number of sets has occurred. Further, the second addition command includes information of "3", which is the number of sets to be added this time. When receiving the second addition command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the set number of "3" has been given.

If a negative determination is made in step S2208, a first additional lottery process is executed (step S2211). In the first additional lottery process, the number of remaining sets in AT state ST5 is increased by using the first additional lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate an additional amount. The number of sets that can be selected in the first additional lottery process is any one of 0 times, 1 time, and 2 times. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the probability that one or more sets will be selected, and the larger the expected value of the number of sets selected. becomes.

If the number of sets of 1 or 2 is selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2212: YES), the number of sets selected in the first additional lottery process is added to the set number counter of the main side RAM 74. (Step S2213). After that, a third addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2214). The third addition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an addition of the remaining number of sets has occurred. Further, the third addition command includes information on the number of sets to be added this time. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the third addition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the set count that is currently subject to addition has been given. .

Next, the AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. The AT process is executed in step S1005 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the AT process also stops the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. executed later.

First, the value of the AT continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2301). Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the additional period counter in the main side RAM 74 is greater than or equal to 1, it is determined whether the current state is in the additional period (step S2302).

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S2302: NO), it is determined whether the add-on winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2303). When the additional period transition lottery process (step S2203) at the start of the current game results in an additional period transition winning, the additional winning flag is set to "1."

If the add-on winning flag is set to "1" (step S2303: YES), an add-on period setting process is executed (step S2304). In the add-on period setting process, a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of consecutive games in the add-on period, is set in the add-on period counter of the main side RAM 74. After that, after clearing the additional winning flag to "0" (step S2305), a command to start the additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2306). The start command for the additional period is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the period has shifted to the additional period. When the production side MPU 92 receives the command to start the supplement period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a production indicating that the supplement period has started and a production indicating that it is the supplement period. do it like this.

Thereafter, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2307). In the freeze counter setting process, a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) at the time of transition to the additional period is set in the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The freeze period set in the freeze counter is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S208 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated. If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, in step S317 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), provided that any ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". If a negative determination is made, the process waits in step S317. The timing at which the process of step S317 is executed is the timing after the reel control process (step S313), the response process at the end of the game (step S314), and the medium provision process (step S315). Therefore, when the transition to the additional period is set, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R basically stops in the game in which the transition is set, and the gaming state transition process and the media giving process are performed. You will not be able to start a new game until the freeze period for transitioning to the additional period has passed after the game is completed. Then, since the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the top-up period has started during the freeze period of transition to the top-up period, the player is informed that the top-up period has started. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

If the value of the add-on period counter is 1 or more and it is the add-on period (step S2302: YES), the value of the add-on period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2308). If the value of the additional period counter after the subtraction by 1 becomes "0" (step S2309: YES), a command to end the additional period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2310). The add-on period end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on period has ended. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the command to end the add-on period, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the add-on period has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, if the process of step S2307 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2309, or if the process of step S2310 is executed, the value of the AT continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0". ” (step S2311). When the value of the AT continuation counter is "0" (step S2311: YES), the value of the set number counter of the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether the value of the set number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2313).

If the value of the set number counter is 1 or more (step S2313: NO), a process for starting a new set of AT state ST5 is executed. Specifically, first, the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "50" as the initial number of continuation games of the new set (step S2314). Thereafter, an AT continuation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2315). The AT continuation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new set of AT state ST5 has been started. When receiving the AT continuation command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that a new set of AT state ST5 has been started.

Thereafter, the second output start flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2316). The second output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in a situation where external output corresponding to the start of a new set of AT state ST5 is to be executed. Further, the AT signal OFF setting process is executed (step S2317), and the OFF continuation counter setting process is executed (step S2318). The processing in steps S2317 and S2318 will be explained later.

If the value of the set number counter is "0" (step S2313: YES), a process for setting the termination preparation state ST6 is executed (step S2319). In this setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The termination preparation state flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the termination preparation state ST6 is set, and when the termination preparation state flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the termination preparation state ST6. Further, the termination preparation completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2320). As already explained, the termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6.

In the termination preparation state ST6, as already explained, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process of the game section (FIG. 41) and the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", execute a process to determine whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, and execute the second control process of the game section in the current game ( 41) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and moving to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 ends.

After executing the process in step S2320 in the AT process (FIG. 45), the AT status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2321). As a result, the AT state ST5 ends and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, an AT end command indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2322). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. Thereafter, the external output end flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2323). The external output end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output state corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 and transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is to be set.

<About the add-on period>
Next, the additional period in AT state ST5 will be explained in more detail.

In the additional period, the additional period processing of step S2215 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2201 in the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 44). In the processing for the additional period, details of which will be described later, in each game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an additional number of sets in AT state ST5, and if the player wins, the number of sets is added. Then, when the number of sets is added, a corresponding effect can be executed. In this case, a plurality of types of performance modes are set that determine the execution mode of the performance.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the production mode during the additional period.

As shown in FIG. 46, a first performance mode, a second performance mode, and a third performance mode are set as performance modes during the additional period. These 1st to 3rd production modes determine whether or not to notify the number of sets eligible for additional set number in the case of winning the additional number of sets, and whether or not to notify the number of sets eligible for additional number of sets in the situation where a freeze period does not occur during the additional period. The difference depends on whether or not a notification that allows the player to recognize that he or she has won is executed.

In other words, in the case of winning an additional number of sets during the additional period, the number of sets subject to additional winnings is one, two, or three. In this configuration, when an additional winning is made for the number of sets and the said additional winning is notified, whether or not to notify the player up to the number of sets selected at that time is the first to third points. There are differences in the production mode.

When a notification indicating that an addition of the set number of times has occurred during the addition period is executed, a relatively loud audio corresponding to the addition is output from the speaker 62 in order to enhance the production effect. In this case, if the audio corresponding to the addition is suddenly output in a situation where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been announced, the player who was surprised by it may mistakenly stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced during the add-on period, if an add-on win for the number of sets is achieved, a freeze period basically occurs in the middle under the control of the main MPU 72. During the midway freeze period, control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by the player's operations is blocked. Then, during the intermediate freeze period, the additional audio is output. As a result, even if the player is surprised by the voice that supports the addition, since the control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in response to the player's operations is blocked at that timing, it is possible that the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be incorrect. The characteristics are reduced.

On the other hand, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not announced, an additional win for the number of sets may occur. Even if the player is surprised by the output of the add-on sound in such a situation, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is arbitrary, so the player may end up making a mistake in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There isn't. Therefore, no intermediate freeze period occurs in this situation. The first to third performance modes differ in whether or not to notify that the set number of additional winnings has been achieved in this situation.

The first production mode is a mode in which when it is announced that the number of sets has been won, the number of sets that are subject to additional winnings will be announced, and even if there is no freeze period in the middle, the number of sets will be increased. This is the mode in which notification of additional winnings is executed. The second performance mode is a mode in which the number of sets eligible for additional winning is not announced when it is announced that the number of sets has been won, and even if there is no freeze period in the middle, the number of sets can be added. This is the mode in which notification of winning is executed. The third production mode is a mode in which the number of sets that are subject to additional winning is announced when it is announced that the number of sets has been won, and in a situation where there is no freeze period in the middle, the number of sets that have been won with an additional number of sets is announced. This is a mode in which notification of what has happened is not performed.

When transition to the additional period occurs, as already explained, basically a freeze period occurs at the time of transition to the additional period. Since the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period occurs after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped, a new game cannot be started until the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period has elapsed. Furthermore, during the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the additional period is started. After the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period has passed, it becomes possible to start the first game in the additional period, but at this timing, the image display device 63 changes the production mode for the additional period to the first to third production modes. An image is displayed to determine which one to use.

FIGS. 47(a) to 47(d) are explanatory views for explaining image display for determining which of the first to third effect modes the effect mode is to be set to. As shown in FIG. 47(a), the mode determination image G1 includes a selection target mode image G2 indicating the type of production mode to be selected, and a selection target mode image G2 indicating the type of production mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2. A switching period image G3 indicating the remaining switching period until switching to the next type of production mode, and an operation suggestion image G4 suggesting an operation for determining the type of production mode are included.

The selection target mode image G2 includes a first corresponding image "mode 1" corresponding to the first production mode, a second corresponding image "mode 2" corresponding to the second production mode, and a second corresponding image corresponding to the third production mode. A third corresponding image called "Mode 3" is displayed. These corresponding images are displayed as if arranged in a ring. In addition, the type of production mode that corresponds to the compatible image that is displayed closest to the front among these compatible images will be selected, and the compatible image that is displayed closest to the front will be changed in a predetermined order every time the remaining switching period passes. be done. Specifically, if the remaining switching period has elapsed in a situation where the first corresponding image is displayed closest to the front as shown in FIG. 47(a), the first corresponding image is displayed closest to the front as shown in FIG. 47(b). The displayed image is changed to the second corresponding image. Then, when the remaining switching period has elapsed, the image displayed closest to the front is changed to the third compatible image, and when the remaining switching period has passed further, the image displayed closest to the front is changed to the first compatible image. Return to image.

The switching period image G3 displays an image that allows the player to recognize the length of the remaining switching period. Specifically, a gauge display is performed in the switching period image G3, and the shorter the remaining switching period, the smaller the length dimension of the gauge display. Note that the remaining switching period is set to 3 seconds, but it is arbitrary.

In the operation suggestion image G4, a character image indicating that the operation for determining the type of performance mode is the operation of the start lever 41 is displayed. When the start lever 41 is operated and an opportunity to start the game occurs, at that timing, the type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 is selected in this additional period. It becomes a different kind of production mode. For example, if the start lever 41 is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 47(a) and an opportunity to start the game occurs, the performance mode that occurs during this additional period becomes the first performance mode, and for example, as shown in FIG. 47(b). When the start lever 41 is operated in the situation shown and an opportunity to start the game occurs, the performance mode that occurs in the current additional period becomes the second performance mode.

Here, in this additional period, the type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image that is displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated and the game start opportunity occurs as described above. In the configuration where the type of production mode that occurs is set, by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or setting a bet by operating the credit input button 47, the type of production corresponding to the corresponding image that is selected at that timing is activated. There is a risk that some players may misunderstand the mode. Since the player mistakenly assumes that the type of performance mode has been determined at the time of setting the bet, the subsequent operation timing of the start lever 41 selects a type of performance mode that is different from the desired type of performance mode. There is a risk that the timing may be the target. In particular, if a bet is set and the start lever 41 is immediately operated when the remaining switching period for which the desired type of performance mode is selected, a type of performance mode different from the desired type of performance mode is selected. There is a high possibility that the production mode will be selected.

On the other hand, the present slot machine 10 is configured to reset the remaining switching period for the performance mode of the type selected at that time to an initial value at the timing when a bet is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the second corresponding image is displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2, and the remaining switching period displayed in the switching period image G3 is the initial value of 1. /5, when a bet is set in a situation where the second corresponding image is displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 as shown in FIG. 47(d), the switching period continues. The remaining switching period displayed in image G3 is returned to its initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is an operation to determine the type of performance mode, it is possible to ensure that the desired type of performance mode can be determined as the performance mode for the current add-on period. becomes.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for determining the production mode as described above will be explained. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the production mode selection process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the production mode selection process is executed in the production control process (FIG. 56) during AT, which will be described later.

First, by determining whether the selection period flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not it is the selection period of the performance mode (step S2401). The selection period flag is a flag used by the performance side MPU 92 to specify whether or not it is the selection period of the performance mode. If the selection period flag is not set to "1" and it is not the selection period of the production mode (step S2401: NO), the start production flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". By determining whether the value of the performance control counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether it is the start timing of the selection period of the performance mode (step S2402). The start effect flag is a flag used by the effect side MPU 92 to specify whether the situation is after the start effect of the additional period started by receiving the start command of the additional period from the main side MPU 72. The production control counter is a counter for specifying the switching timing of various productions by the production side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, processing for starting the start effect of the add-on period is executed on the condition that the start command of the add-on period has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2403: YES). Specifically, first, the start effect table for the additional period is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2404). The start effect table for the additional period is a table in which various data for executing the start effect for the additional period are set. The performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the table for the start effect of the additional period, so that the start effect of the additional period is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. to be executed. Further, a start performance reference value is set in the performance control counter of the performance side RAM 94 (step S2405), and "1" is set in the start performance flag of the performance side RAM 94. The start performance reference value corresponds to a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) at the time of transition to the additional period, which is set in the main side MPU 72 when transitioning to the additional period. Further, the various data set in the start effect table for the additional period is data that enables the start effect of the additional period to be executed over the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period. As a result, the start effect of the additional period will be executed over the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period.

The value set in the performance control counter is decremented periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds). If the value of the performance control counter becomes "0" after the start performance reference value is set in the performance control counter in step S2405, it means that the start performance of the additional period has ended. Note that at this timing, the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period in the main MPU 72 also ends. If the start performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the value of the performance control counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, and the performance mode is set. Execute processing to start the selection period.

Specifically, first, the table for the selection period of the performance mode is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2407). The performance mode selection period table is a table in which various data for executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode selection period are set. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the table for the selection period of the production mode, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 control the selection period of the production mode. Ensure that the corresponding performance is executed. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a mode determination image G1 shown in FIGS. 47(a) to 47(d).

Thereafter, the target performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2408). The target performance counter is a counter for the performance side MPU 92 to specify the performance mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2 in the mode determination image G1. When the value of the target performance counter is "0", the performance mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2 is the first performance mode, and when the value of the target performance counter is "1", the selection target mode The production mode to be selected in the image G2 is the second production mode, and if the value of the selection target counter is "2", the production mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2 is the third production mode. becomes. In addition, data for displaying the selection target mode image G2 corresponding to each production mode being selected on the image display device 63 is set in the table for the selection period of the production mode, and the production side The MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 based on data corresponding to the value of the selection target counter among these data, thereby displaying a selection target mode image corresponding to the type of production mode currently being selected. Make G2 displayed.

Thereafter, a switching reference value is set in the performance control counter of the performance side RAM 94 (step S2409), and the selection period flag of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the start performance flag of the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". (Step S2410). The switching reference value corresponds to the remaining switching period (specifically, 3 seconds) until the production mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2 is switched to the next type of production mode. The value set in the performance control counter is decremented periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

If the selection period flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2401 and the processing during the selection period is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a bet setting command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2411), and it is determined whether a credit increase command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2412). As already explained, the bet setting command is executed when a bet is set based on inserting a medal into the medal slot 45 in the start waiting process of the main side MPU 72 (FIG. 14), or when a bet is set based on the operation of the credit inserting button 47. This is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when this is performed (step S404, step S408). Further, as already explained, the credit increase command is executed when the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 based on the insertion of medals into the medal slot 45 in the start waiting process of the main side MPU 72 (FIG. 14). This is a command sent from the side MPU 72 (step S410).

If a bet setting command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2411: YES) or if a credit increase command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2412: YES), the selection target is selected in the selection target mode image G2. Processing for resetting the remaining switching period is executed for the type of production mode that is set. In this process, after setting a switching reference value in the performance control counter of the performance side RAM 94 (step S2413), a reset adjustment process is executed (step S2414). In the reset adjustment process, data for displaying the switching period image G3 in the selection period table of the performance mode is adjusted to data for returning the remaining switching period displayed in the switching period image G3 to its initial value. As a result, even if an image in which the remaining switching period is reduced halfway in the switching period image G3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(c), the selection as shown in FIG. 47(d) The remaining switching period displayed in the switching period image G3 is returned to the initial value without changing the type of the corresponding image displayed closest to the front in the target mode image G2.

When the selection period flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2415: YES), the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is set. The corresponding additional period table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2416), and the selection period flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2417). As already explained, the game start command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 after the winning combination is completed in the winning combination processing (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 72 (step S513). Since the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed when a game start opportunity occurs based on the operation of the start lever 41, the game start command is transmitted when the start opportunity occurs. Then, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 executes the processing of steps S2416 and S2417, thereby generating an opportunity to start the game based on the operation of the start lever 41. In this case, the production mode selection period ends and the type of production mode that is the selection target in the selection target mode image G2 at that point becomes the type of production mode determined to be executed in the current additional period. .

If the selection period flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the value of the production control counter in the production side RAM 94 is "0" (step S2418: YES), the selection target mode image G2 This means that the remaining switching period has elapsed until the production mode selected is switched to the next type of production mode. In this case, the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S2419), and if the value of the target performance counter after adding 1 exceeds "2" (step S2420: YES), The target performance counter is cleared to "0" (step S2421). As a result, when the remaining switching period has elapsed, the performance mode that is the selection target in the selection target mode image G2 is switched to the next type of performance mode.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how the type of performance mode to be executed in the additional period is determined during the selection period of the performance mode. FIG. 49(a) shows a situation in which the production mode is selected, FIG. 49(b) shows a period in which the first production mode is selected in the selection target mode image G2, and FIG. 49(c) shows a situation in which the first production mode is selected. FIG. 49(d) shows a period in which the second production mode is the selection target in the selection target mode image G2, and FIG. 49(d) shows a period in which the third production mode is the selection target in the selection target mode image G2. (e) shows the remaining switching period measured using the performance control counter of the performance side RAM 94, FIG. 49(f) shows the operation timing of the start lever 41, and FIG. This indicates the timing at which the value of the bet number setting counter 74a or the credit counter 74b increases.

First, a case will be described in which a replay winning (specifically, a first chance replay winning or a second chance replay winning) is achieved in the previous game, and an add-on period starts in the next game.

If you win the index value IV=14 or 15 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the previous game, and you win the transition period for the bonus period in the transition lottery process for the bonus period (step S2203), the first chance replay In a game in which a winning or a second chance replay winning is achieved, a process is executed to shift the game to an add-on period. Then, at timing t1 when the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period has elapsed, the selection period of the production mode is started as shown in FIG. 49(a). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the mode determination image G1 as shown in FIG. 47(a). Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the mode determination image G1 is started, the selection target is the first effect mode as shown in FIG. A first corresponding image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 49(e), the initial value of the remaining switching period is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94, and measurement of the remaining switching period is started.

Thereafter, the value of the production control counter becomes "0" at each of timing t2, timing t3, and timing t4, as shown in FIG. 49(e). That is, the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed at each of these timings. Therefore, at the timing t2, the selection target is changed from the first performance mode to the second performance mode as shown in FIGS. 49(b) and 49(c). In this case, the corresponding image displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode to the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode. Furthermore, at timing t3, the selection target is changed from the second performance mode to the third performance mode as shown in FIGS. 49(c) and 49(d). In this case, the corresponding image displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode to the third corresponding image corresponding to the third effect mode. Furthermore, at timing t4, the selection target is changed from the third performance mode to the first performance mode as shown in FIGS. 49(b) and 49(d). In this case, the corresponding image displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the third corresponding image corresponding to the third effect mode to the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the upper limit number of game media has been bet, as shown in FIG. 49(f). Therefore, an opportunity to start the game occurs. The type of performance mode to be selected at the timing t5 is the first performance mode as shown in FIG. 49(b). Therefore, the type of performance mode to be executed in this additional period is the first performance mode. Then, an additional period in which the execution target of the performance is the first performance mode is started.

Next, a case will be described in which a replay winning is not achieved in the previous game and the add-on period starts in the next game.

If you win the index value IV = 10 to 13, 18 to 21 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the previous game, and you win the transition to the bonus period in the bonus period transition lottery process (step S2203), Processing is executed to shift the game to the add-on period in the game in which the replay winning is not achieved. Then, at timing t6 when the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period has elapsed, the selection period of the production mode is started as shown in FIG. 49(a). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the mode determination image G1 as shown in FIG. 47(a). Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the mode determination image G1 is started, the selection target is the first effect mode as shown in FIG. A first corresponding image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 49(e), the initial value of the remaining switching period is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94, and measurement of the remaining switching period is started.

Thereafter, at timing t7, the value of the production control counter becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 49(e). In other words, the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed at the timing of t7. Therefore, at the timing t7, the selection target is changed from the first performance mode to the second performance mode as shown in FIGS. 49(b) and 49(c). In this case, the corresponding image displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode to the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49(e), at timing t8, which is a timing before the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed, the bet number setting counter 74a or credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is activated as shown in FIG. 49(g). The value of increases. In other words, a bet is set by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or the number of virtual medals is increased, or a bet is set by operating the credit insert button 47. In this case, the initial value of the remaining switching period is reset as shown in FIG. 49(e) while the selected presentation mode is maintained in the second presentation mode as shown in FIG. 49(c). .

Thereafter, at timing t9, the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the upper limit number of game media has been bet, as shown in FIG. 49(f). Therefore, an opportunity to start the game occurs. The type of performance mode to be selected at the timing t9 is the second performance mode as shown in FIG. 49(c). Therefore, the type of performance mode to be executed in this additional period is the second performance mode. Then, an additional period in which the execution target of the performance is the second performance mode is started.

At the timing when the bet setting is made as described above, the remaining switching period for the type of production mode that is the target of selection at that time is reset to the initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is an operation to determine the type of performance mode, it is possible to ensure that the desired type of performance mode can be determined as the performance mode for the current add-on period. becomes.

Furthermore, even if no bet is set, even if the number of virtual medals increases based on the insertion of medals into the medal slot 45, the remaining switching period for the type of presentation mode that is selected at that time will be initialized. reset to the value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that inserting medals into the medal slot 45 is an operation to determine the type of performance mode, the desired type of performance mode is determined as the performance mode for the current additional period. It becomes possible to obtain it.

Next, the additional period processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. Note that the additional period processing is executed in step S2215 in the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 44).

First, a second additional lottery process is executed (step S2501). In the second additional lottery process, the number of remaining sets in the AT state ST5 is increased by using the second additional lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate an additional amount. In the second additional lottery process, if you win an index value IV other than index value IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21, or if you do not win any index value IV, there is a 30% probability of 1 set. 2 sets of additions are selected with a 10% probability, and 3 sets of additions are selected with a 10% probability. If the index value IV = 10 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 10% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 30% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 60% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 11 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 50% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 25% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 25% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 12 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 60% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 20% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 20% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 13 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 20% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 40% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 40% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 14 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 30% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 35% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 35% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 15 is won, 1 set of additions will be selected with a 50% probability, 2 sets of additions will be selected with a 25% probability, and 3 sets of additions will be selected with a 25% probability. Ru. If the index value IV = 18 or 19 is won, there is a 20% probability that 1 set of additions will be selected, a 40% probability that 2 sets of additions will be selected, and a 40% probability that 3 sets of additions will be selected. selected. If the index value IV = 20 or 21 is won, there is a 10% probability that 1 set of additions will be selected, a 40% probability that 2 sets of additions will be selected, and a 50% probability that 3 sets of additions will be selected. selected.

As described above, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the higher the expected value of the number of sets to be added. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). Additionally, if you win an index value other than IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 15), or if you do not win any index value IV, the number of sets will not be increased. On the other hand, if one of the index values IV=10 to 15 and 18 to 21 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the number of sets will certainly be increased. As a result, during the add-on period, the player expects to win one of the index values IV=10 to 15 and 18 to 21 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15).

If one or more set times are selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2501) (step S2502: YES), an addition process for the set times is executed (step S2503). In the set count addition process, the set count selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501) is added to the set count counter in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be notified in the current game (step S2504). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=1 to 10 has been won in the current winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, a mid-way freeze occurrence flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2505). The mid-game freeze occurrence flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is necessary to generate a freeze period during the game.

Thereafter, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2506). In the freeze counter setting process, an intermediate freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. As already explained, the freeze period set in the freeze counter is subtracted in the timer subtraction process in step S208 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated. If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more in a situation where the midway freeze occurrence flag is set to "1", one of the ending flags provided in the main side RAM 74 must not be set to "1". Under this condition, the process waits in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13) or step S720 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). Further, in a situation where an intermediate freeze period is occurring, a notification indicating that an additional number of sets has occurred is executed, and the intermediate freeze period is longer than the period in which the notification is executed. As a result, in a game where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the add-on period is announced, before the stop operation is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the stop order notification, the add-on compatible audio is transmitted. When additional notification of the number of sets included is executed, stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the player's operation is reliably prevented in a situation where the notification is executed. Therefore, even if the player is surprised by the generation of the add-on sound, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Note that the timing at which the process of step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13) is executed is after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. Therefore, the timing at which the process of step S720 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed is when there are reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has not yet been issued, and one reel 32L, 32M, 32R exists. This is the timing after the rotation of 32R is completed. Therefore, the additional notification of the number of sets and the intermediate freeze period are the timing immediately before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts, and the timing when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the first stop targets, is completed. , and at the timing when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the second stop targets, is completed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=7 to 10 has been won in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 15) (step S2507). As already explained, in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be notified, but in the case of the index value IV = 1 to 6. The types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the first and second objects to be stopped are notified, whereas when the index value IV=7 to 10, the reels 32L, 32L, and 32R that are the first objects to be stopped are notified. The types of reels 32M and 32R are notified, but the types of reels 32L, 32M and 32R, which are the second and third stop targets, are not notified.

If any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 15) (step S2507: NO), a lottery process for the generation timing is executed (step S2508). In the generation timing lottery process, the timing at which the intermediate freeze period is to be generated is determined by lottery using a generation timing lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74. The timing of occurrence of the intermediate freeze period is the start timing, which is the timing after the winning combination processing (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts, and the first stop. At the timing of the first stop, which is the timing when the rotation of the target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has completed, and at the timing when the rotation of the second stop target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has completed. There is a certain second stop timing. The probability of being selected in the occurrence timing lottery process in step S2508 is the same regardless of the start timing, the first stop timing, or the second stop timing.

When the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S2508) (step S2509: YES), the start time occurrence flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2510). The start time occurrence flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the intermediate freeze period should be generated at the start timing.

In normal processing (FIG. 13), "1" is not set to any ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S308: NO), and the midway freeze occurrence flag of the main side RAM 74 and the main side If both of the start generation flags in the RAM 74 are set to "1" (step S309 and step S310: YES), a freeze generation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S311). The freeze generation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the midway freeze period occurs under the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that an additional notification of the set number of times including an additional audio is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S312). If the measurement of the intermediate freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, a negative determination is made in step S312, and the process of step S312 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited until the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S312 and the reel control process (FIG. 23) of step S313 is started, thereby starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the process for the top-up period (FIG. 50), the process of setting the start occurrence flag of the main side RAM 74 to "1" in step S2510 results in a top-up win in the second top-up lottery process (step S2501). This is also executed when the index value IV=7 to 10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) for the current winning combination (step S2507: YES). As already explained, if one of the index values IV=7 to 10 is won in AT state ST5, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the first stop target are announced, but the second stop target and the third stop target are announced. The types of target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not reported. In this configuration, if there is an additional win in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), and if the index value IV = 7 to 10 is won in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 15), the main side By setting the start generation flag in the RAM 74 to "1", in a game in which only the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped are notified, an additional winning can be achieved in the second additional lottery process (step S2501). In this case, it is possible to perform an additional notification of the number of sets including a voice that supports addition, with a freeze period in the middle, at a timing before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. .

If the first stop timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S2508) (step S2511: YES), the first stop occurrence flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( Step S2512). The first stop occurrence flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the intermediate freeze period should be generated at the timing of the first stop.

In the reel control process (FIG. 23), "1" is not set in any ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S716: NO), and "1" is set in the midway freeze occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74. 1" is set (step S717: YES), and the first stop occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in a situation where the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the first stop targets, is completed. If so (step S718: YES), a freeze generation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S719). The freeze generation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the midway freeze period occurs under the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that an additional notification of the set number of times including an additional audio is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S720). If the measurement of the intermediate freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, a negative determination is made in step S720, and the process of step S720 is repeatedly executed. As a result, activation of the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited until the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S720, and the process of step S704 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed, thereby validating the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Ru.

Returning to the explanation of the additional period processing (FIG. 50), if the timing of the second stop is selected in the occurrence timing lottery processing (step S2508) (step S2511: NO), the second stop timing provided in the main side RAM 74 is The 2-stop occurrence flag is set to "1" (step S2513). The second stop occurrence flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the intermediate freeze period should be generated at the second stop timing.

In the reel control process (FIG. 23), "1" is not set in any ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S716: NO), and "1" is set in the midway freeze occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74. 1" is set (step S717: YES), and the second stop occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in a situation where the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the second stop targets, is completed. If so (step S718: YES), a freeze generation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S719). The freeze generation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the midway freeze period occurs under the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that an additional notification of the set number of times including an additional audio is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S720). If the measurement of the intermediate freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, a negative determination is made in step S720, and the process of step S720 is repeatedly executed. As a result, activation of the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited until the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S720, and the process of step S704 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed, thereby validating the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Ru.

When the process of step S2510, the process of step S2512, or the process of step S2513 is executed, a freeze compatible winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2514). The freeze-compatible winning command includes information indicating that an additional prize was won in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), information on the number of sets for the additional target selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), and information indicating that a freeze period will occur in the middle of the current game. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze compatible winning command, it executes the corresponding process. The details of this process will be explained later.

On the other hand, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not announced in this game, that is, if one of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is not won in the lottery process (Fig. 15) for the current role ( Step S2504: NO), a non-freeze compatible winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2515). The non-freeze compatible winning command includes information indicating that an additional winning was achieved in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), and information on the number of sets for the additional target selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501). , and information indicating that no intermediate freeze period will occur in this game. When the production side MPU 92 receives the non-freeze compatible winning command, it executes the corresponding process. The details of this process will be explained later.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the production control process during the add-on period executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the effect control process during the add-on period is executed in the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56), which will be described later.

If a freeze compatible winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2601: YES), by determining whether the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "1", It is determined whether the performance mode to be selected is the second performance mode (step S2602). If it is not the second effect mode (step S2602: NO), storage processing of the number of additional sets is executed (step S2603). In the storage process of the number of additional sets, information on the number of sets for the additional set set in the freeze corresponding winning command received this time is set in the number of additional sets counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The add-on set number counter is a counter for specifying the number of sets of the add-on target selected in the most recent second add-on lottery process (step S2501) by the production side MPU 92. Further, storage processing of the total number of additional sets is executed (step S2604). In the storage process of the total number of additional sets, information on the number of sets to be added set set in the freeze corresponding winning command received this time is added to the total number of sets counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The total number of sets counter is a counter for the performance side MPU 92 to specify the total number of sets added in the current addition period.

As already explained, the first performance mode and the third performance mode are modes in which when it is announced that the set number of additions have been won, the number of sets that are subject to additional winnings is notified, whereas the second performance mode The production mode is a mode in which, when it is announced that the set number has been won with an additional number of sets, the number of sets that are subject to additional winnings is not notified. In this case, as described above, if the mode is the first effect mode or the third effect mode, the processes of step S2603 and step S2604 are executed, thereby winning an additional set number of times in the first effect mode and the third effect mode. When notifying that this has occurred, it is possible to notify the number of sets that are subject to addition.

In the production control process during the add-on period, it is determined whether a freeze generation command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2605). The freeze generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 in step S311 in normal processing (FIG. 13) when the generation timing of the intermediate freeze period is at the start timing, and the generation timing of the intermediate freeze period is at the first stop. or the timing of the second stop, the main side MPU 72 transmits the signal in step S719 in the reel control process (FIG. 23).

If a freeze generation command has been received (step S2605: YES), audio data corresponding to addition is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2606). The production-side MPU 92 controls the speaker 62 to output sound corresponding to the audio data corresponding to the addition in the sound output control process, so that the additional notification period (specifically, 2 seconds) is shorter than the intermediate freeze period. To output a comparatively loud addition compatible sound over a period of time.

Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "1", it is determined whether the performance mode to be selected in the current additional period is the second performance mode. Determination is made (step S2607). If it is not the second performance mode (step S2607: NO), a display table for notification of the number of times is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2608). The display table for notification of the number of times is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the value (specifically, "1" to "3") that can be set in the additional set number counter of the performance side RAM 94. In step S2608, a display table for notification of the number of times of the type corresponding to the value of the additional set number counter of the performance side RAM 94 is read out. The production side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for notification of the number of times, so that the image display device 63 displays not only an image indicating that the addition of the set number of times has occurred, but also an image that is subject to addition in the current number of additions. An image showing the number of sets achieved is displayed. As a result, when it is announced that the player has won an additional number of sets in the first performance mode and the third performance mode, the number of sets eligible for the additional number is also notified.

If it is the second performance mode (step S2607: YES), a display table for number non-notification is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2609). The production side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for non-notification of the number of times, so that although an image indicating that an addition of the set number of times has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63, An image showing the number of sets that are subject to addition is not displayed. As a result, when it is reported that the player has won an additional number of sets in the second performance mode, the number of sets that are subject to additional winnings is not notified.

In the performance control process during the add-on period, it is determined whether a non-freeze compatible winning command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2610). The non-freeze compatible winning command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when an additional winning is achieved in the second additional lottery process (step S2501) in a game in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

If the non-freeze compatible winning command has been received (step S2610: YES), by determining whether the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "2", the selection target in this additional period is determined. It is determined whether the current performance mode is the third performance mode (step S2611). As already explained, the first performance mode and the second performance mode are modes in which notification of the additional winning of the set number of times is executed even in a situation where a freeze period does not occur, whereas the third performance mode The performance mode is a mode in which the notification of the additional winning of the set number of times is not executed in a situation where a freeze period does not occur in the middle.

If it is the third effect mode (step S2611: YES), the processing from step S2612 onwards is not executed. As a result, in the third effect mode, in a situation where a freeze period does not occur in the middle, notification of an additional winning of the set number of times is not performed.

If the mode is the first performance mode or the second performance mode (step S2611: NO), a lottery process for notification generation timing is executed (step S2612). In the notification generation timing lottery process, the announcement generation timing lottery table provided in the performance side ROM 93 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 are used to notify that a set number of additional wins have been won. The timing of occurrence will be determined by lottery. The notification generation timing is the timing at the start of the production side, which is the timing after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts, and the first stop. The timing of the first stop on the performance side, which is the timing when the rotation of the target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed, and the rotation of the second stop target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has completed. There is a timing at which the second stop on the performance side occurs. The probability of being selected in the notification generation timing lottery process in step S2612 is the same regardless of the start timing, the first stop timing, or the second stop timing. Information corresponding to the timing selected in the notification generation timing lottery process (step S2612) is stored in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2613).

Note that the timing at which the game start command (step S513) is received from the main side MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at which the performance side starts. The timing at which the stop instruction command (step S707) at the time of the first stop is received from the main side MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at the time of the first stop on the production side. The timing at which the stop instruction command at the time of the second stop (step S707) is received from the main side MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at the time of the second stop on the performance side.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the performance mode to be selected in the current additional period is the first performance mode. Determination is made (step S2614). As already explained, the first production mode is a mode in which when it is announced that the number of set additions has been won, the number of sets that are subject to addition is notified, whereas the second production mode is a mode in which the number of sets that are subject to addition is notified. This is a mode in which the number of sets eligible for additional winnings is not reported when it is announced that the player has won an additional prize.

If it is the first effect mode (step S2614: YES), storage processing of the number of additional sets is executed (step S2615). In the storage process of the number of additional sets, information on the number of sets for the additional set set in the non-freeze corresponding winning command received this time is set in the number of additional sets counter of the performance side RAM 94. As already explained, the add-on set number counter is a counter for specifying the number of sets of the add-on target selected in the most recent second add-on lottery process (step S2501) on the production side MPU 92. Furthermore, storage processing of the total number of additional sets is executed (step S2616). In the storage process of the total number of additional sets, information on the number of sets to be added set set in the non-freeze compatible winning command received this time is added to the total number of sets counter in the performance side RAM 94. As already explained, the total set number counter is a counter for specifying the total number of sets added in the current addition period by the performance side MPU 92.

In the performance control process during the add-on period, it is determined whether or not it is the notification generation timing (step S2617). If the performance side RAM 94 stores information corresponding to the start timing of the performance side, when a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72, an affirmative determination is made in step S2617, and the performance side RAM 94 stores the information corresponding to the timing of the start of the performance side. If information corresponding to the timing of the first stop is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S2617 when a stop instruction command corresponding to the first stop is received from the main side MPU 72, and the information is stored in the production side RAM 94. If information corresponding to the timing of the second stop on the production side is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S2617 when a stop instruction command corresponding to the second stop is received from the main side MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2617, the audio data corresponding to addition is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2618). The performance side MPU 92 performs sound output control corresponding to the audio data corresponding to the addition in the sound output control process to the speaker 62, thereby producing a relatively loud sound over the additional notification period (specifically, 2 seconds). Enable audio that supports addition to be output.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the target performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the performance mode to be selected in the current additional period is the first performance mode. Determination is made (step S2619). If it is the first performance mode (step S2619: YES), a display table for notification of the number of times is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2620). The display table for notification of the number of times is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the value (specifically, "1" to "3") that can be set in the additional set number counter of the performance side RAM 94. In step S2620, a display table for notification of the number of times of the type corresponding to the value of the additional set number counter of the performance side RAM 94 is read out. The production side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for notification of the number of times, so that the image display device 63 displays not only an image indicating that the addition of the set number of times has occurred, but also an image that is subject to addition in the current number of additions. An image showing the number of sets achieved is displayed. As a result, when it is announced that the player has won an additional number of sets in the first performance mode, the number of sets eligible for the additional number of players is also notified.

If it is the second performance mode (step S2619: NO), a display table for non-notification of the number of times is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2621). The production side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for non-notification of the number of times, so that although an image indicating that an addition of the set number of times has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63, An image showing the number of sets that are subject to addition is not displayed. As a result, when it is reported that the player has won an additional number of sets in the second performance mode, the number of sets that are subject to additional winnings is not notified.

In the performance control process during the add-on period, it is determined whether an end command for the add-on period has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2622). The add-on period end command is sent in step S2310 in the AT process (FIG. 45) when the add-on period ends. When the end command of the additional period is received (step S2622: YES), by determining whether the value of the target effect counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "1", it is determined whether or not the target effect is selected in the current additional period. It is determined whether the current performance mode is the second performance mode (step S2623). If it is not the second performance mode (step S2623: NO), the end table for notification of the number of times is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2624). The end table for notification of the number of times is a table for displaying on the image display device 63 an image showing the total number of set times added in the current addition period. In step S2624, after reading the end table for number notification into the performance side RAM 94, the information stored in the total set number counter of the performance side RAM 94 is written to the end table for number notification. Then, by executing the display control of the image display device 63 by the production side MPU 92 according to the end table for number notification, an image indicating the total number of set times given in this additional period is displayed on the image display device 63. Displayed in .

If it is the second performance mode (step S2623: YES), the end table for number non-notification is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2625). The production side MPU 92 controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the end table for non-notification of the number of times, so that although an image indicating that the additional period has ended is displayed on the image display device 63, there is no period for this additional period. An image showing the total number of sets given in the above is not displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 52, a description will be given of how the midway freeze period is set differently depending on whether or not the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified. 52(a) shows a period in which one game is being executed, FIG. 52(b) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is rotating, and FIG. 52(c) shows a period in which the middle reel 32M is rotating. 52(d) shows the period in which the right reel 32R is rotating, and FIG. 52(e) shows the period in which the right reel 32R is rotating, and FIG. 52(f) shows a situation in which a freeze period occurs in the middle, and FIG. 52(g) shows a period in which the add-on audio is output from the speaker 62.

In the add-on period, a new game is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 52(a), and rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIGS. 52(b) to 52(d). be done. In addition, in this game, in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 15), the winner is won with the index value IV=1 to 6, so at the timing of t1, the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display section 66 start notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Thereafter, by operating the middle stop button 43 at timing t2, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is first stopped as shown in FIG. 52(c). In this case, the timing at the first stop is selected in the generation timing lottery process in step S2508 of the additional period process (FIG. 50) at the start of the current game. Therefore, at the timing t2, the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is started as shown in FIG. 52(f), and the output of the audio corresponding to the addition from the speaker 62 is started as shown in FIG. 52(g). Then, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the output of the audio corresponding to the addition is stopped, and at the subsequent timing t4, the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed as shown in FIG. 52(f). As a result, the output of the add-on sound is completed in a situation where the second stop operation is disabled, so even if the player is surprised by the output of the add-on sound with a relatively loud sound, This makes it possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being stopped in the wrong order.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the right reel 32R is stopped for a second time at a timing t5, and as shown in FIG. 52(b), the left reel 32L is stopped for a third time at a timing t6. At the timing t6, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 52(a). Further, at the timing t6, the stop order notification ends as shown in FIG. 52(e).

Thereafter, a new game is started at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 52(a). In addition, in this game, in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 15), the winner is won with the index value IV=1 to 10, so at the timing of t7, the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display section 66 start notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this case, the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process in step S2508 of the additional period process (FIG. 50) at the start of the current game. Therefore, at the timing t7, the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is started as shown in FIG. 52(f), and the output of the audio corresponding to the addition from the speaker 62 is started as shown in FIG. 52(g). Then, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the output of the audio corresponding to the addition is stopped, and at the subsequent timing t9, the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed as shown in FIG. 52(f). As a result, the output of the voice corresponding to the top-up is completed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts, so even if the player is surprised by the output of the voice corresponding to the top-up with a relatively loud sound, , thereby making it possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being stopped in the wrong order.

At timing t9 when the measurement of the intermediate freeze period is completed, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started as shown in FIGS. 52(b) to 52(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the right reel 32R is stopped at timing t10, and as shown in FIG. 52(c), the middle reel 32M is stopped for a second time at timing t11, and as shown in FIG. 52(b). As shown in FIG. 52A, the left reel 32L is brought to a third stop at the timing t12, and the current game ends at the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 52(a). Further, at the timing t12, the stop order notification ends as shown in FIG. 52(e).

After that, a new game is started at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 52(a), and rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIGS. 52(b) to 52(d). Ru. In addition, in this game, since no one has won any of the index values IV=1 to 10 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display section 66 as shown in FIG. In this case, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

Thereafter, by operating the left stop button 42 at timing t14, the rotation of the left reel 32L is first stopped as shown in FIG. 52(b). In this case, the timing at the first stop on the performance side is selected in the notification generation timing lottery process in step S2612 of the performance control process (FIG. 51) during the add-on period at the start of the current game. Therefore, at timing t14, output of the audio corresponding to addition from the speaker 62 is started as shown in FIG. 52(g). However, in this game, the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is not reported, so no mid-freeze period occurs as shown in FIG. 52(f). Then, at timing t15, the output of the audio corresponding to the addition is stopped as shown in FIG. 52(g). As a result, in a situation where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, the additional sound is output in a situation where a freeze period that is a forced stop period of the game does not occur.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the right reel 32R is stopped for a second time at timing t16, and as shown in FIG. 52(c), the middle reel 32M is stopped for a third time at timing t17. At the timing t17, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 52(a).

<About the ending period>
Next, the ending period in AT state ST5 will be explained. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the ending handling process is executed in step S1917 in the second control process (FIG. 41) of the game section.

First, it is determined whether the first ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2701). The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2, which is measured using the number of consecutive games counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games. It is.

If the first ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2701: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c in the main side RAM 74, the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74, The sum of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the set number counter provided in the RAM 74 and the value of the initial number of consecutive games (50 games) in one set in AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. It is determined whether or not (step S2702). The AT continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining continuation games in one set in the AT state ST5. When the set in AT state ST5 continues, the initial number of continuous games in one set is 50 games, and the remaining number of continuous games can be increased if the additional condition is satisfied in the middle of the set. The set number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games. Note that the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or may be more than 1500 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the first ending flag is set to "1" (step S2703). When the first ending flag is set to "1", the details will be described later, but in the AT state ST5, processing is executed to increase the number of remaining consecutive games and the number of remaining sets. When a top-up occurs, a freeze period is not set, and a performance that allows the player to recognize that the top-up has occurred is not executed.

Thereafter, a first ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2704). The first ending command includes information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the number of continuous games counter 74c with respect to the maximum number of games in the second section SC2. included. By receiving the first ending command, the production side MPU 92 can grasp that the first ending flag is set to "1" in the main side MPU 72. If the production-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period, it changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to the ending period. Ensure that the corresponding execution mode is achieved.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, a negative determination is made in step S2702, or the process of step S2704 is executed, whether the second ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" or not. (Step S2705). The second ending flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the restricted total number of net additions of gaming media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit net addition number. It's a flag.

If the second ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2705: NO), the value of the AT continuation counter, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the set count counter, and the initial number of continuation games in one set in AT state ST5. (50 games) and the expected value of game media acquired in AT state ST5, and the result is added to the value of the total acquisition counter 74d, and the result is greater than or equal to the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2. It is determined whether or not (step S2706). The expected value of game media acquired in one game in AT state ST5 is approximately 5 pieces. As already explained, the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 sheets. Note that the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2,400 sheets, and may be less than 2,400 sheets or may be more than 2,400 sheets.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S2707). When the second ending flag is set to "1", the details will be described later, but in AT state ST5, processing is executed to generate an addition of the remaining number of consecutive games and an addition of the remaining number of sets. When a top-up occurs, a freeze period is not set, and a performance that allows the player to recognize that the top-up has occurred is not executed.

Thereafter, a second ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2708). The second ending command includes information on the limited total net increase in number of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, the value of the total acquired number counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2. Contains information corresponding to the difference between By receiving the second ending command, the production side MPU 92 can grasp that the second ending flag is set to "1" in the main side MPU 72. If the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period, it changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to the ending period. Ensure that the corresponding execution mode is achieved.

Next, the processing content of the main MPU 72 when the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" will be described.

The processing content of the AT state processing (FIG. 44) at the start of the game is that even if the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the first ending flag and the second ending flag This is the same situation as when both ending flags are not set to "1". Furthermore, the processing content of the AT processing (FIG. 45) is such that even if the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the processing contents of the first ending flag and the second ending flag are This is the same situation as when both are not set to "1". As a result, even if the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a situation where both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1". Similarly, a process for adding the remaining number of consecutive games in AT state ST5 and a process for adding the remaining number of sets in AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, since there is no need to change the processing contents of these additional processing depending on whether "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the main MPU 72. becomes.

In the normal process (FIG. 13), if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S316: YES), the process of step S317 is not executed. As a result, if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", it is assumed that a transition to the additional period of AT state ST5 has occurred in the control of the main side MPU 72. However, there will be no freeze period when transitioning to the additional period.

In normal processing (FIG. 13), if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S308: YES), the midway freeze occurrence flag of the main side RAM 74 and the start Even if the time occurrence flag is set to "1", the processes of step S311 and step S312 are not executed. In addition, in the reel control process (FIG. 23), if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S716: YES), the main side RAM 74 freezes midway. Even if the first stop occurrence flag is set to "1" in a situation where the flag is set to "1" and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the first stop targets have been stopped, the step S719 And the process of step S720 is not executed. In addition, in the reel control process (FIG. 23), if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S716: YES), the main side RAM 74 freezes midway. Even if the second stop occurrence flag is set to "1" in a situation where the flag is set to "1" and the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the second stop targets, is completed, step S719 And the process of step S720 is not executed. As a result, if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", even if an additional number of sets occurs in the additional period under the control of the main side MPU 72, There will be no intermediate freeze period.

As mentioned above, if there is a high possibility that the ending conditions of the second section SC2 will be met and the effect corresponding to the ending period is occurring, even if the transition to the additional period of AT state ST5 occurs, the transition to the additional period will not be possible. A freeze period does not occur, and even if an additional number of sets occurs in the additional period of AT state ST5, no intermediate freeze period occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent a freeze period in which the progress of the game is forced to wait due to the execution of the additional processing in a situation where the effect corresponding to the ending period has already been executed. becomes.

Depending on whether the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the manner of execution of the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R differs. The content will be explained below. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification process during AT, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the stop order notification process during AT is executed in step S1308 in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33) in the AT state ST5.

In the case of AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2801: YES), it is possible to establish the first bell prize. A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S2802), and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is set so that the first bell prize can be achieved. A command for winning the first bell to be announced on the image display device 63 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2803). In addition, in the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2804: YES), the second bell prize can be established. A display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S2805), and a display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is displayed. A second bell winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so that the stop order is notified on the image display device 63 (step S2806).

The processes from step S2801 to step S2806 are executed regardless of whether the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". As a result, even if the performance corresponding to the ending period is being executed in AT state ST5, it is possible to win the first bell if the index value IV = 1 to 6 is won. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, and if the index value IV=7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, which makes it possible to win the second bell prize. The stopping order will be announced.

In the stopping order notification process at the time of AT, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won with the index value IV=10 in the lottery process (FIG. 15). As already explained, the index value IV=10 is set with the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data. In the case of a win with index value IV = 10, if the left reel 32L is stopped first, regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. The first bell prize is established. On the other hand, in the case of winning with index value IV = 10, if the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped first, the first bell will be won or A special bell prize is established. In this case, priority is given to establishing the special bell winning, and even if the special bell winning cannot be established due to the relationship with the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first bell winning is definitely established. If the index value IV=10 is won in AT state ST5, the probability of winning the additional period transition in the additional period transition lottery process (step S2203) is higher than other index values IV, as already explained. Furthermore, if the index value IV=10 is won in the AT state ST5, an affirmative determination is made in step S2208 in the AT state processing (FIG. 44) at the start of the game even if the winning period is not transferred to the additional period. The process of adding the number of sets (step S2209) is reliably executed.

In a configuration where it is highly advantageous to win the index value IV = 10, if you win the index value IV = 10 in AT state ST5 and in a situation where the first and second ending flags are not set to "1" , the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is announced, which makes it possible to achieve a special bell win that would not occur if a win was won at another index value IV. In other words, if the winning combination is in the AT state ST5 and the index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2807: YES), the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 On the condition that "1" is not set in both (step S2808: NO), the stop order setting process for reverse push notification is executed (step S2809), and a command for reverse push notification is sent to the production side MPU 92. Send (step S2810).

FIG. 55(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how reverse push notification is executed when the index value IV=10 is won. If the index value IV=10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first and second ending flags are not set to "1", a reverse push notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 in step S2810. As a result, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 55(a1), and "White 7" is displayed on the left reel 32L. A display is displayed indicating that the player should aim for the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. Furthermore, by executing the stop order setting process for reverse push notification in step S2809, the dual-purpose display section 66 indicates that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 55(a2). A display corresponding to the stop order is displayed. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and each stop is made so that the "White 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML3. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML3 as shown in FIG. 55(a3).

Furthermore, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, each stop is made so that the "White 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol are stopped on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. Also, even if the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the "White 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol will stop on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. If each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not operated at the stop operation timing, the first bell prize is established.

On the other hand, in a situation where either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1" in AT state ST5, there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is already satisfied. At the same time, the production corresponding to the ending period has started. Under such circumstances, even if an additional number of sets is actually generated under the control of the main MPU 72, no profit is actually given to the player, so the index value IV = 10. If a special bell prize is established in the event of winning, there is a risk that the player may think that he has won in vain for the index value IV with a low probability of winning. Therefore, if the index value IV=10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1", then if the index value IV is won at another index value IV, The order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is notified so that the first bell prize that can also be achieved can be realized. In other words, in the case of AT state ST5, if the index value IV=10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2807: YES), the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2808: YES), executes a stop order setting process for forward press notification (step S2811), and transmits a forward press notification command to the production side MPU 92. (Step S2812).

FIG. 55(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the forward press notification is executed when the index value IV=10 is won. If the index value IV=10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1", a forward press notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 in step S2812. By being transmitted, the image display device 63 performs a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 55(b1). Furthermore, by executing the stop order setting process for sequential press notification in step S2811, the dual-purpose display section 66 indicates that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 55(b2). A display corresponding to the stop order is displayed. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell prize is surely established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b3). .

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the production control process during AT executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the production control process during AT is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the AT state ST5 or end preparation state ST6.

First, it is determined whether or not the ending flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2901). The ending flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether the situation is after receiving the first ending command or the second ending command from the main side MPU 72 in the current AT state ST5. If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2901: NO), a production mode selection process is executed (step S2902). The contents of the production mode selection process (FIG. 48) are as already described. Moreover, if it is during the add-on period (step S2903: YES), the effect control process during the add-on period is executed (step S2904). The contents of the production control process (FIG. 51) during the add-on period are as already explained.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903 or if the process in step S2904 is executed, other AT control processes are executed (step S2905). As for other control processing during AT, for example, when the first addition command is received from the main MPU 72, an effect indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred when transitioning to the addition period is displayed on the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and the image display device 63. For example, when the second addition command is received from the main MPU 72, an effect indicating that the set number of "3" has been given is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Execute the process to make it happen. For example, when the third addition command is received from the main MPU 72, an effect indicating that the set number that is subject to addition this time has been added is displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Execute the process to ensure that it is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the first ending command or the second ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2906). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, the ending flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2907). Thereafter, information necessary to satisfy the ending condition is stored (step S2908). Specifically, if the ending command received this time is the first ending command, information about the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the first ending command is satisfied, that is, Information corresponding to the difference in the value of the continuous game number counter 74c with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is read out, and the read information is stored in a first ending condition storage area provided in the production side RAM 94. In addition, if the ending command received this time is the second ending command, the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the second ending command is satisfied. , that is, the information corresponding to the difference in the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2, and store the read information in the second ending condition storage area provided in the performance side RAM 94. .

After that, it is determined whether the information stored in the first ending condition storage area or the second ending condition storage area of the performance side RAM 94 corresponds to the establishment of the generation condition for the ending performance (step S2909). The ending performance is a performance that is performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 for a predetermined number of games before the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. If the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the occurrence standard number of games, which is a predetermined number of games less than the upper limit number of games, that is, if the information stored in the first ending condition storage area is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, the ending The conditions for the occurrence of the performance are satisfied. The standard number of games for occurrence is arbitrary, but in the present slot machine 10, it is set to 1450 games. Therefore, the predetermined number of games is 50 games. In addition, if the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference number, which is a predetermined number less than the upper limit net increase number, that is, the information stored in the second ending condition storage area is the predetermined number of sheets. In the following cases, the conditions for generating the ending effect are satisfied. The standard number of coins to be generated is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, it is set to 2150 coins. Therefore, the predetermined number of sheets is 250 sheets.

If the conditions for generating the ending effect are not satisfied (step S2909: NO), the data table of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2910). The ending confirmation performance data table is a table in which various data for executing the ending confirmation performance as a performance corresponding to the ending period are set. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the ending confirmation effect, so that the ending confirmation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Do it like this.

FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display contents of the ending confirmation effect executed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57(a), in a situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, the character image G11 corresponding to the ending confirmation effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the ending confirmation effect is occurring. A confirmed notification image G12 is displayed that allows the player to recognize. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 will be met.

Returning to the explanation of the production control process during AT (FIG. 56), if the conditions for generating the ending production are satisfied (step S2909: YES), the ending execution flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S2911). The ending execution flag is a flag for specifying on the presentation side MPU 92 that the ending presentation is being executed. Further, the data table for the ending performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2912). The ending performance data table is a table in which various data for executing the ending performance are set. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the ending production, so that the ending production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Do it like this.

FIG. 57(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display content of the ending effect executed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57(b), in a situation where the ending effect is being executed, the character image G13 corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that the ending condition for the second section SC2 will soon be met.

Returning to the explanation of the production control process during AT (FIG. 56), if the ending flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2901: YES), the ending execution flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". It is determined whether it is set (step S2913). If the ending execution flag is not set to "1" (step S2913: NO), and on the condition that the winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2914: YES), the process of updating the ending corresponding information is performed. Execute (step S2915).

As already explained, the production-side RAM 94 includes a first ending condition storage area that is used by the production-side MPU 92 to specify the number of games required for the ending condition to be met, and a memory area necessary for the ending condition to be met. A second ending condition storage area is provided which is used by the production side MPU 92 to specify a limited total net increase in the number of game media. As already explained, the first ending condition storage area is necessary until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the first ending command is satisfied when the first ending command is received from the main MPU 72. Information about the number of games, that is, information corresponding to the difference between the value of the continuous game number counter 74c and the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is stored. In addition, as already explained in the second ending condition storage area, when the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the second ending command is satisfied. Information on the limited total number of net additions of game media necessary for the game, that is, information corresponding to the difference between the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d and the upper limit net addition number in the second section SC2 is stored.

After receiving the first ending command or the second ending command, the ending corresponding information update process is executed in step S2915 until the second section initialization command is received next time. In the update process, each time the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the performance MPU 92 subtracts 1 from the value in the first ending condition storage area. Furthermore, each time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, if the number of game media of the player increases in the current game, a value corresponding to the increased number of game media is stored in the second ending condition storage area. If the player's game media has decreased in the current game, the value corresponding to the decreased number of game media is added to the value in the second ending condition storage area.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the ending correspondence information is occurrence reference information (step S2916). Specifically, if the value in the first ending condition storage area of the production side RAM 94 is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916. That is, if the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the occurrence reference number of games, which is a predetermined number of games less than the upper limit number of games, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916. Further, if the value in the second ending condition storage area of the production side RAM 94 is less than or equal to the predetermined number of sheets, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916. That is, if the limited total net increase number of gaming media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the generation reference number, which is a predetermined number less than the upper limit net increase number, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2916, the ending execution flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2917), and the data table for the ending performance is read from the performance-side ROM 93 to the performance-side RAM 94 (step S2918). . The contents of these processes are the same as steps S2911 and S2912. As a result, the ending effect is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2906, if the process of step S2910 is executed, if the process of step S2912 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2913, if a negative determination is made in step S2914, if the process of step S2910 is executed, If a negative determination is made in step S2918 or if the process of step S2918 is executed, an end control process is executed (step S2919). FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the termination control process.

First, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72 or whether it is time to start a game where the ending condition is met (step S3001). As already explained, the AT end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 in step S2322 of the AT processing (FIG. 45) in the main side MPU 72 when the AT state ST5 ends. In addition, the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, which is stored in the first ending condition storage area in step S2908 in the production control process (FIG. 56) during AT, becomes "1". , or the limited total of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 stored in the second ending condition storage area in step S2908 in the production control process (FIG. 56) during AT is satisfied. When the information on the number of net additions is 12 or less, it is determined that the current game is the start of a game where the ending condition is satisfied. Note that the information in the first ending condition storage area is decremented by 1 at the end of one game, so if the game is started in a situation where the value of the first ending condition storage area is "1", the information in the corresponding game The ending condition is definitely satisfied at the end of . Further, the information in the second ending condition storage area is updated at the end of one game, but the updated contents vary depending on the manner in which winnings are achieved. Therefore, even if a game is started in a situation where the value of the second ending condition storage area is 12 or less, the ending condition may or may not be satisfied in the game. In some cases.

If the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition being satisfied, an affirmative determination is made in step S3001 upon receiving the AT end command from the main MPU 72. Furthermore, if the AT state ST5 ends due to the fulfillment of the ending condition, the value in the first ending condition storage area or the second ending condition storage area of the production side RAM 94 will be set to the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. Taking this as a trigger, an affirmative determination is made in step S3001.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the ending performance is being executed by determining whether the ending execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S3002). If the ending execution flag is not set to "1" (step S3002: NO), the ending data table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3003). The ending data table is a table in which various data are set for executing an AT end effect that occurs when the AT state ST5 ends without executing an ending effect. The effect-side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in accordance with the end data table, so that the AT end effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Make it.

If the ending execution flag is set to "1" (step S3002: YES), the data table for the final performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3004). The final effect data table is a table in which various data for executing the final effect that occurs when the AT state ST5 ends while the ending effect is being executed. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table for the final production, so that the final production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Make it. The final performance is a performance that has continuity with the ending performance. When the AT state ST5 ends in a situation where the ending performance is being executed, a final performance that has continuity with the ending performance is executed following the ending performance. It becomes possible to provide a series of performances to the player.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether a second section initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3005). As already explained, the second section initialization command is used when the end preparation state ST6 of one game that occurs after the AT state ST5 ends, or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, It is transmitted from the main MPU 72 in step S1916 in the second control process (FIG. 41).

If the second section initialization command has been received (step S3005: YES), various clearing processes are executed (step S3006). In the various clearing processes, various storage areas of the production side RAM 94 used in the AT state ST5, such as an ending flag, an ending execution flag, a first ending condition storage area, a second ending condition storage area, etc., are cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the data table of the transition waiting performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3007). The data table for the transition wait effect is for executing a transition wait effect that indicates that the AT state ST5 has ended and also indicates that the transition from the first section SC1 of the effect to the second section SC2 is being waited for. This is a table in which various data are set. The performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the transition waiting performance, so that the transition waiting performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. do it like this.

FIG. 57(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display contents of the transition waiting effect executed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57(c), in a situation where a transition waiting effect is being executed, a character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and also indicates that the AT state ST5 has ended. A character image of "END" is displayed as the end character image G15. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that the AT state ST5 has ended and that the player is now waiting for transition to the second section SC2.

Next, the operation of the slot machine 10 when the ending condition is satisfied in the AT state ST5 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. 59(a) shows a period in the second section SC2, FIG. 59(b) shows a period in the AT state ST5, and FIG. 59(c) shows the remaining continuation game in the AT state ST5 in the main MPU 72. 59(d) shows the situation during the freeze period, and FIG. 59(e) shows the occurrence of the addition of the remaining number of consecutive games in AT state ST5. FIG. 59(f) shows a period when the ending flag in the RAM 94 on the production side is set to "1", and FIG. 59(g) shows a period when the ending confirmation effect is being executed. FIG. 59(h) shows a period in which the ending effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a second section SC2 is started at timing t1 in a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. Then, by executing a repeated game in the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, the gaming state shifts to the AT state ST5 at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 59(b).

Thereafter, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the main MPU 72 executes additional processing for increasing the number of remaining sets in the AT state ST5. The process for the top-up is the process of step S2213 that is executed when the first top-up lottery process (step S2211) results in a top-up win (step S2212: YES). As a result, the number of sets selected in the first additional lottery process is added. In addition, when the processing for addition is executed, the third addition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2214), so the upper lamp 61 and the speaker are activated at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 62 and the image display device 63, an additional performance corresponding to the current addition is executed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the main MPU 72 executes additional processing for increasing the number of remaining consecutive games in the AT state ST5. The process for the top-up is the process of step S2205 that is executed when the top-up period transition lottery process (step S2203) results in a winning of the top-up period transition (step S2204: YES). Further, a freeze counter setting process corresponding to the transition to the additional period is executed (step S2307). If the value of the freeze counter becomes 1 or more in a situation where both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 are not set to "1", the result is negative in step S317 in the normal processing (FIG. 13). It will be judged. Therefore, a freeze period occurs at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 59(d). Furthermore, when the additional period is started, a command to start the additional period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2306), so the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and An additional effect corresponding to the start of the additional period is executed on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the main MPU 72 executes additional processing for increasing the number of remaining sets in the AT state ST5. The processing for adding up is the processing in step S2209 that is executed when the index value IV=10 results in a win (step S2208: YES). As a result, the number of sets of "3" is added as the number of sets when the rare combination is won. Further, if the index value IV=10 is won, the stop order for reverse push notification is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(a1), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary, and "White 7" is displayed on the left reel 32L. ” symbol, a “white 7” symbol is displayed on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol is displayed on the right reel 32R. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55(a2), the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and each stop is made so that the "White 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML3. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 55(a3). In addition, when the processing for addition is executed, a second addition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2210), so the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and the image display device 63, an additional performance corresponding to the current addition is executed.

By executing the additional processing at the timing t5, "1" is set to the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 59(f). At the same time, "1" is set in the ending flag of the performance side RAM 94. In this case, the conditions for generating the ending effect have not yet been satisfied. In other words, the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 is not more than 1450 games, which is the standard number of games, and furthermore, the total net increase in the limited number of gaming media in the second period SC2 is not less than 2150, which is the standard number of games. It is not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(g), the ending confirmation effect is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Thereafter, in a situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, the main side MPU 72 executes additional processing at each of timing t7 and timing t8, as shown in FIG. 59(c). As the additional processing, when the process of step S2205 is executed, a value is added to the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, and when any of the processes of step S2209, step S2213, and step S2503 is executed. The value is added to the set number counter of the main side RAM 74. However, since the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 has already been set to "1", even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the number of sets counter is added as described above, the actual This does not mean that a profit is given to the player. Furthermore, even if the transition to the add-on period and the add-on during the add-on period occur, the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", so that step S308 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) Alternatively, an affirmative determination is made in step S316. Therefore, even if a value of 1 or more is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74, no freeze period occurs.

Further, even if the index value IV=“10” is won, the stop order for reverse push notification will not be notified, but the stop order for forward press notification will be notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(b1), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55(b2), the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell prize is surely established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b3). .

In addition, since the ending flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 in the production control process (FIG. 56) during AT, so that the processing in steps S2902 to S2912 is not executed. . Therefore, even if the main side MPU 72 executes the additional processing, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 do not perform the corresponding additional effect.

Thereafter, at timing t9, the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 becomes 1450 games or more, which is the standard number of games to occur, or the total net increase in the restricted total number of gaming media in the second period SC2 is 2150, which is the standard number of games to occur. When the number of cards or more is reached, the condition for generating the ending effect is satisfied. Therefore, at the timing t9, as shown in FIGS. 59(g) and 59(h), the ending confirmation effect is finished and the ending effect is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Thereafter, in a situation where the ending effect is being executed, the main side MPU 72 executes additional processing at timing t10 and timing t11, respectively, as shown in FIG. 59(c). However, similar to the situation where the ending confirmation performance is being executed, the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 has already been set to "1", so the AT continuation counter or set number counter is Even if the value is added, it does not actually mean that a profit is given to the player. Further, a freeze period does not occur, and even if the index value IV=“10” is won, the stop order for press notification will be announced, and no additional performance will be performed.

Thereafter, in a situation where the ending performance is being executed, the ending condition is satisfied at timing t12. When the ending condition is satisfied, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1 as shown in FIG. 59(a), and the AT state ST5 ends and the normal state occurs as shown in FIG. The game state becomes ST1. Furthermore, at the timing t12, the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 59(h). In this case, the final effect is executed in the ending effect at the timing when the game is started in which the ending condition is met. Further, at timing t12, as shown in FIG. 59(f), the first ending flag and the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0", and the ending flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". .

As described above, even if the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a situation where both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1". Similarly, a process for adding the remaining number of consecutive games in AT state ST5 and a process for adding the remaining number of sets in AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, since there is no need to change the processing contents of these additional processings depending on whether "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the main MPU 72. becomes.

On the other hand, if the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the number of sets counter is added, the player will not receive a substantial profit. does not mean that it has been granted. On the other hand, if the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the freeze period, reverse push notification, and additional effects will not be executed due to the execution of additional processing. . As a result, it is possible to prevent a performance from being executed as if a profit has been given to the player, even though no profit has actually been given to the player.

<About the first section SC1>
Next, the execution contents of the effect in the first section SC1 and the execution contents of the effect in the case of transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 will be explained.

In the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section executed in step S511 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), as already explained, if any winning combination is won in the first section SC1 (step S1801: NO) , step S1802: YES), and in step S1803, processing for moving to the second section SC2 is executed. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won in the first section SC1 (step S1801 and step S1802: NO), a non-transition compatible process is executed in step S1810. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing non-migration compatible processing.

First, the value of the non-transfer continuous counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3101). The non-transition continuous counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games executed in the first section SC1 without transition to the second section SC2. Thereafter, the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transfer continuous counter and the setting value set as the current target of use is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S3102). Then, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed (step S3103). In the setting suggestion lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is compared against the setting suggestion lottery table read out in step S3102. Select the setting suggestion command to be sent. Thereafter, a setting suggestion command corresponding to the result of the setting suggestion lottery process is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3104).

FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transfer continuous counter and the setting value set as the current target of use, and FIG. 61(b) ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each setting suggestion lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", if the setting value is between "1" and "3", the first suggestion lottery table is used as the setting suggestion lottery table. is selected, and if the set value is between "4" and "6", the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is one of "3" to "5", if the setting value is "1" or "2", the first suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and "3" is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. ” or “4”, the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is “5” or “6”, the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. be done. If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, if the setting value is "1", the table for setting 1 is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is "2", it is set as the setting suggestion lottery table. If the setting value is "3", the setting 3 table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is "4", the setting 4 table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. , if the setting value is "5", the table for setting 5 is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is "6", the table for setting 6 is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table.

In each setting suggestion lottery table, numerical information of lottery counters that become winners is set in correspondence with a plurality of types of setting suggestion commands. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the types of setting suggestion commands to be selected and the selection probabilities of the setting suggestion commands to be selected differ depending on the type of setting suggestion lottery table. Specifically, as setting suggestion commands, a low expectation level command, a medium expectation level command, a high expectation level command, a low setting command, a medium setting command, and a high setting command are set.

The low expectation level command is a high setting value of "5" or "6" that is used to indicate that the expectation level is low. This is a command to be executed at 63. FIG. 62(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the image display device 63 executes the effect corresponding to the low expectation level command. As shown in FIG. 62(a), the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image "Expectations?" is displayed as the character image G21 corresponding to the low expectation effect.

The medium expectation level command uses the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and This is a command to be executed on the image display device 63. In a situation where the image display device 63 displays the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect and also displays the character image "END" as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended, the medium expectation level A character image of "Expectations!" is displayed as a character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The high expectation level command is a high setting value such as a setting value of "5" or a setting value of "6". This is a command to be executed at 63. In a situation where the image display device 63 displays the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect and also displays the character image "END" as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended, the expectation level is high. A character image of "hot!" is displayed as a character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The low setting command causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "1" or "2" is set to be used. This is a command for In a situation where the image display device 63 displays the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect and also displays the character image "END" as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended, the low setting value range A character image "Low setting!!" is displayed as a character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The medium setting command causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "3" or "4" is set to be used. This is a command for FIG. 62(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the medium setting command is executed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 62(b), the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image "Intermediate setting!!" is displayed as the character image G22 corresponding to the intermediate setting value range effect.

The high setting command causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "5" or "6" is set to be used. This is a command for FIG. 62(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the image display device 63 executes the effect corresponding to the high setting command. As shown in FIG. 62(c), the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image "High setting!!" is displayed as the character image G22 corresponding to the high setting value range effect.

When a low setting command, medium setting command, or high setting command is sent, the setting value set to be used is the setting value of the low setting range (“1” or “2”), medium setting An effect is executed that indicates whether the setting value is in the range ("3" or "4") or the setting value in the high setting range ("5" or "6"), whereas the low expectation level command , if either a medium expectation level command or a high expectation level command is sent, it is determined whether the set value to be used is a setting value in the high setting range (“5” or “6”). Although it is possible to predict whether the ) and the setting value in the high setting range (“5” or “6”) is not performed. Therefore, a player who wants to understand the setting values that are set to be used may use the low setting command, medium setting command, or Alternatively, it is expected that the effect corresponding to the high setting command will be executed.

If the value of the non-migration continuous counter is "1" or "2" and the setting value set for use is one of "1" to "3", or if the value of the non-migration continuous counter is " In the first suggestion lottery table that is selected when the setting value set for use is "1" or "2", there is a 70% probability that a small The expectation level command is selected, the medium expectation level command is selected with a probability of 20%, and the high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 10%, whereas the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command are selected. Not selected. If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2" and the setting value set for use is one of "4" to "6", or if the value of the non-transition continuous counter is " In the second suggestion lottery table that is selected when the setting value set for use is "3" or "4", there is a 40% probability that the small The expectation level command is selected, the medium expectation level command is selected with a probability of 30%, and the high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 30%, whereas the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command are selected. Not selected. In the third suggestion lottery table that is selected when the value of the non-transfer continuous counter is one of "3" to "5" and the setting value set as the target of use is "5" or "6". The low expectation command is selected with a 10% probability, the medium expectation command is selected with a 20% probability, and the high expectation command is selected with a 70% probability, whereas the low expectation command, Medium setting commands and high setting commands are not selected.

In the setting 1 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "1", the low expectation command is selected with a 40% probability. The medium expectation level command is selected with a probability of 10%, the low setting command is selected with a 50% probability, whereas the high expectation level command, medium setting command, and high setting command are not selected. In the setting 2 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "2", the low expectation command is selected with a 40% probability. The medium expectation level command is selected with a probability of 20%, the low setting command is selected with a 40% probability, whereas the high expectation level command, medium setting command, and high setting command are not selected. In the setting 3 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "3", the medium expectation command is selected with a 50% probability. The high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 10%, the medium setting command is selected with a 40% probability, whereas the low expectation level command, low setting command, and high setting command are not selected. In the table for setting 4, which is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "4", the medium expectation command is selected with a 40% probability. The high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 10%, the medium setting command is selected with a 50% probability, whereas the low expectation level command, low setting command, and high setting command are not selected. In the table for setting 5, which is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "5", the medium expectation command is selected with a 10% probability. The high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 50%, the high setting command is selected with a 40% probability, whereas the low expectation level command, low setting command, and medium setting command are not selected. In the setting 6 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "6", the medium expectation command is selected with a 10% probability. The high expectation level command is selected with a probability of 40%, the high setting command is selected with a 50% probability, while the low expectation level command, low setting command, and medium setting command are not selected.

Due to the above configuration, each time a game in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination processing (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1 is executed, the setting value set as the target of use is in the high setting value range. An effect that suggests a certain degree of expectation or an effect that clearly indicates a setting value range that includes the setting value that is set to be used is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by a game in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", either the first suggestion lottery table or the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table, whereas the non-transition continuous counter If the value is one of "3" to "5", one of the first suggestion lottery table, the second suggestion lottery table, and the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table. Therefore, the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is one of "3" to "5" is more likely to be set for use than the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2". This makes it easier to predict the possibility that the setting value currently being used is in the high setting value range. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by repeated games in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, a suggestion lottery table that corresponds one-to-one to the setting value set as the target of use is read out, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and a setting suggestion command is issued. Among the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command, a command corresponding to a corresponding setting value range may be selected as a transmission target. As a result, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the lottery process (Figure 15) in the first section SC1 is repeated for six or more games, the setting value set as the target of use is It is possible to provide an opportunity to recognize which of the low setting value range, medium setting value range, and high setting value range the setting value corresponds to. Therefore, in the first section SC1, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by repeated games in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and it is possible to On the contrary, this can be advantageous for players who want to know in which setting value range the setting value falls.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the production control process during non-AT executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the performance control process during non-AT is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the normal gaming state ST1.

If any setting suggestion command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3201: YES), the display table corresponding to the received setting suggestion command is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S3202). The display table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting suggestion commands, and by reading the display table, a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the currently received setting suggestion command is added to the transition waiting effect. is executed. As already explained, on the image display device 63, a setting suggestion image corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time is additionally displayed in a situation where an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is being displayed.

If a setting suggestion command has not been received (step S3201: NO), it is determined whether a section transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3203). As already explained, the section transition command is executed on the main side in step S1809 when the process of moving the game section from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is executed in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section. It is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In addition, as already explained, the section transition command includes information on the number of canceled games set in the canceled game number counter in step S1805, and corresponds to the type of transition mode set in the transition mode storage area in step S1807. Contains information.

If the section transition command has not been received (step S3203: NO), other non-AT control processing is executed (step S3209). In the other non-AT control process, when a command different from the setting suggestion command and the section transition command is received, a process is executed so that a corresponding effect is executed.

If a section transition command has been received (step S3203: YES), the information about the number of games to be canceled set in the section transition command is stored in the production side RAM 94 (step S3204), and the information set in the section transition command is Information corresponding to the type of transition mode is stored in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3205). Thereafter, the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the number of canceled games and the transition mode is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3206). Then, a migration suggestion lottery process is executed (step S3207). In the transition suggestion lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the production side RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is compared against the transition suggestion lottery table read out in step S3206. Select the transition image to display. Thereafter, the transition suggestion data table corresponding to the result of the transition suggestion lottery process is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3208). The display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the transition suggestion data table, so that the transition image corresponding to the result of the transition suggestion lottery process is displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 64(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the game number range of the number of unlocked games and the type of transition mode, and FIG. 64(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the transition suggestion lottery table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a table.

As already explained, the number of games to be released is one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games. In this case, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games fall under the first range, 300 games, 400 games, and 500 games fall under the second range, and 50 games, 100 games, and 200 games fall under the third range. do. The smaller the number of unlocked games, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the second range is more advantageous for the player than the first range, and the third range is more advantageous for the player than the second range. be. Furthermore, as described above, the second transition mode is more advantageous for the player than the first transition mode, and the third transition mode is more advantageous for the player than the second transition mode.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), when the number of unlocked games is in the first range, the first lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode or the second transition mode, and the first lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the third transition mode. If so, the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table. When the number of unlocked games is in the second range, the first lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode, and the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the second transition mode. , if it is the third transition mode, the third lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table. When the number of unlocked games is in the third range, the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode, and the third lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the second transition mode. , if the mode is the third transition mode, the fourth lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table.

In each transition suggestion lottery table, numerical information of a lottery counter that is a winner is set in correspondence with a plurality of types of transition images. In this case, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the type of transition image to be selected and the selection probability of the transition image to be selected differ depending on the type of transition suggestion lottery table. Specifically, a first transition image, a second transition image, and a third transition image are set as the transition images.

FIG. 65(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the first transition image, a character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63, and a character image G31 corresponding to the first transition image is displayed. A character image of "normal" is displayed as the first transition character image G32. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred and that the expectation level that the combination of the number of canceled games and the transition mode is advantageous is low.

FIG. 65(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the second transition image, a character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63, and a character image G31 corresponding to the second transition image is displayed. A character image of "expectation" is displayed as the second transition character image G33. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred and that the expectation level is medium, that is, the contents of the combination of the number of canceled games and the transition mode are advantageous.

FIG. 65(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the third transition image, a character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63, and a character image G31 corresponding to the third transition image is displayed. The character image "hot" is displayed as the third transition character image G34. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred and that the content of the combination of the number of canceled games and the transition mode is advantageous and has high expectations.

If the number of unlocked games is in the first range and the type of transition mode is the first transition mode or second transition mode, or if the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is the first transition mode. In the first lottery table selected in this case, the first transition image is selected with a probability of 90%, and the second transition image is selected with a probability of 10%. If the number of unlocked games is in the first range and the type of transition mode is third transition mode, if the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is second transition mode, or if the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is second transition mode, or the number of unlocked games is In the second lottery table that is selected when is in the third range and the type of transition mode is the first transition mode, the first transition image is selected with a 50% probability, and the second transition image is selected with a 40% probability. A transition image is selected, and a third transition image is selected with a probability of 10%. Selected when the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is third transition mode, or when the number of unlocked games is in the third range and the type of transition mode is second transition mode. In the third lottery table, the first transition image is selected with a probability of 10%, the second transition image is selected with a probability of 20%, and the third transition image is selected with a probability of 70%. In the fourth lottery table that is selected when the number of unlocked games is in the third range and the type of transition mode is third transition mode, the second transition image is selected with a probability of 10%, and with a probability of 90%. The third transition image is selected.

With the above configuration, when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the number of canceled games and the transition mode in the current second section SC2 can be determined using the transition image displayed on the image display device 63. It becomes possible for the player to make predictions. In particular, when the third transition image is displayed, there is a high probability that a transition mode with a short number of unlocked games and a high expectation of transition to AT state ST5 has been selected, so the player's attention to the transition image is high. It becomes possible to increase the

Next, the execution contents of the effect from the first section SC1 until the transition to the second section SC2 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 66. 66(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 66(b) shows the period in the second section SC2, FIG. 66(c) shows the period in the AT state ST5, and FIG. 66(d) shows the period in the AT state ST5. 66(e) shows the period during which the transition waiting effect is being executed, FIG. 66(e) shows the period during which the setting suggestion effect is being executed, and FIG. 66(f) shows the period during which the transition effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the second section SC2 and in the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 66(c), as shown in FIG. 66(a), from timing t1 to timing t2. One game is executed. By executing this one game, the termination condition for the AT state ST5 is satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(c) at timing t2, the AT state ST5 ends and enters the end preparation state ST6. Further, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the next game is executed from timing t3 to timing t4, but at timing t4, which is the end timing of the game, the next game is executed as shown in FIG. 66(b). The second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1. Note that the end preparation state ends at the timing t4 and becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

Since the second section SC2 ends as described above at the timing t4 and becomes the first section SC1, the transition waiting effect is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 66(d). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect as shown in FIG. 57(c).

After that, in the situation of the first section SC1, as shown in FIG. One game is executed at each timing, from timing t13 to timing t14, and from timing t15 to timing t16. In this case, in each of these games, no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). Therefore, transition to the second section SC2 triggered by these games does not occur, and the first section SC1 is maintained. Since it is maintained in the first section SC1, as shown in FIG. 66(e), the timing from t5 to the timing from t6, the timing from t7 to the timing from t8, the timing from t9 to the timing from t10, and the timing from t11 to the timing from t12. , the setting suggestion effect is executed from timing t13 to timing t14, and from timing t15 to timing t16. In the setting suggestion effect, as already explained, in a situation where the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is being displayed on the image display device 63, an image corresponding to the setting suggestion is additionally displayed. Further, as the number of executions of the game that does not trigger the transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 increases, the accuracy of the setting value suggestion in the setting suggestion performance increases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(a), one new game is executed from timing t17 to timing t18. In the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) executed at the start of the game, one of the winning combinations is won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 at the timing t17. Further, as shown in FIGS. 66(d) and 66(f), the transition waiting performance is completed and the transition performance is started. In the transition effect, a transition image corresponding to the combination of the number of games to be canceled and the transition mode determined at the time of transition to the current second section SC2 is displayed on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(a), one new game is executed from timing t19 to timing t20. At timing t19, which is the start of the game, the transition effect ends as shown in FIG. 66(f). In this case, the display of the transition image on the image display device 63 ends.

<About external output>
Next, a configuration related to external output of an AT signal indicating the AT state ST5 will be described.

This slot machine 10 is provided with an external output terminal board 78 (see FIG. 10). The external output terminal board 78 is provided with an output terminal for an AT signal, and the output terminal for the AT signal is electrically connected to the main MPU 72 and connected to a gaming hall provided outside the slot machine 10. electrically connected to the management computer.

The AT signal output terminal and the main MPU 72 are electrically connected through a predetermined signal path, and when the HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 through the predetermined signal path, the AT signal output terminal is The HI level AT signal is transmitted to the gaming hall management computer through the terminal. Although details will be described later, when the AT state ST5 is started, the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Further, when one set is continued in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is once lowered from the HI level to the LOW level, and then raised again from the LOW level to the HI level. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends, the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. The management computer of the game hall can measure the number of times the AT state ST5 is set by measuring the number of times the AT signal externally output from the slot machine 10 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the external output setting process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the external output setting process includes the lottery process (Figure 15), the reel control process (Figure 23), the response process at the end of the game (Figure 29), and the media provision process (step S315) in the normal process (Figure 13). It is executed at step S318, which is the timing after the execution.

First, it is determined whether the first output start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3301). As already explained, when the process for transitioning to the AT state ST5 is executed in the normal process (FIG. 43) executed in step S1004 in the game end response process (FIG. 29), the 1 output start flag is set to "1". If the first output start flag is set to "1" (step S3301: YES), after clearing the first output start flag to "0" (step S3302), the AT signal ON setting process is executed ( Step S3303). In the AT signal ON setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. As a result, a HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the AT signal output terminal through a predetermined signal path, and a HI level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the gaming hall through the AT signal output terminal. Ru.

If the first output start flag is not set to "1" (step S3301: NO), it is determined whether the second output start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3304). As already explained, when the process for continuing one set of AT state ST5 is executed in the AT process (FIG. 45) executed in step S1005 in the game end response process (FIG. 29), step S2316 is executed. At this point, the second output start flag is set to "1". Further, in step S2317, AT signal OFF setting processing is executed. In the AT signal OFF setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from HI level to LOW level. As a result, a LOW level AT signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the AT signal output terminal through a predetermined signal path, and a LOW level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the gaming hall through the AT signal output terminal. Ru. Further, in step S2318, setting processing of an OFF continuation counter is executed. In the setting process, numerical information corresponding to the OFF duration period is set in the OFF duration counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The OFF continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the period during which the AT signal is maintained at the LOW level when one set of AT state ST5 is continued. The OFF duration is set to 200 milliseconds, but is arbitrary. Note that if the value of the OFF continuation counter is 1 or more, the value of the OFF continuation counter is subtracted by 1 in the timer subtraction process (step S208) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the output state of the AT signal is switched between a LOW level and a HI level, but may be a configuration in which the output state of the AT signal is switched between an output state and a non-output state.

If the second output start flag is set to "1" (step S3304: YES), after clearing the second output start flag to "0" (step S3305), the value of the OFF continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is By determining whether it is "0" or not, it is determined whether the OFF duration period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) set in the OFF duration counter in step S2318 of the AT process (FIG. 45) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (step S3306). If the value of the OFF continuation counter is 1 or more (step S3306: NO), the process of step S3306 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the OFF continuation counter is "0" (step S3306: YES), the AT signal ON setting process is executed (step S3307). In the AT signal ON setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. As a result, a HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the AT signal output terminal through a predetermined signal path, and a HI level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the gaming hall through the AT signal output terminal. Ru.

If the second output start flag is not set to "1" (step S3304: NO), it is determined whether the external output end flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3308). As already explained, when the process for ending the AT state ST5 is executed in the AT process (FIG. 45) executed in step S1005 in the game end response process (FIG. 29), external control is performed in step S2323. The output end flag is set to "1". Although not shown, even if it is determined in the second control process of the game section (FIG. 41) that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied (step S1906: YES or step S1913: YES), the external output is The end flag is set to "1".

If the external output end flag is set to "1" (step S3308: YES), after clearing the external output end flag to "0" (step S3309), the AT signal OFF setting process is executed (step S3310). ). In the AT signal OFF setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from HI level to LOW level. As a result, a LOW level AT signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the AT signal output terminal through a predetermined signal path, and a LOW level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the gaming hall through the AT signal output terminal. Ru.

Next, how the output level of the AT signal is switched will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 68. FIG. 68(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 68(b) shows the timing at which one set of AT state ST5 ends, and FIG. 68(c) shows the timing when a new set of AT state ST5 starts. FIG. 68(d) shows a period during which a set continuation effect is being executed, and FIG. 68(e) shows a period in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. 68(f) shows the period in which medal payout is being executed, FIG. 68(g) shows the output state of the AT signal, and FIG. 68(h) shows the OFF continuation counter of the main side RAM 74. Indicates the condition.

First, a case will be described in which one set of AT state ST5 is continued in a situation where the ending confirmation performance and the ending performance are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), the game starts at timing t1, and as shown in FIG. 68(e), rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts at timing t1. Furthermore, since the current game is started in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is at the HI level as shown in FIG. 68(g).

Thereafter, at timing t2, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 68(e). In this case, since the value of the AT continuation counter after being subtracted by 1 in the AT process (FIG. 45) becomes "0", one set of the current AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 68(b). However, if the value of the set count counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, processing for starting one new set of AT state ST5 is executed. When the process for starting the one set is executed, an AT continuation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 in step S2315. Therefore, the set continuation effect is started at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 68(c). Furthermore, by executing the AT signal OFF setting process in step S2317, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 68(g). Furthermore, by executing the OFF continuation counter setting process in step S2318, the OFF continuation counter corresponds to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) as shown in FIG. 68(h) at timing t2. The information to be set is set. In addition, in this game, when a prize corresponding to the provision of game media is established and the number of stored virtual medals reaches the upper limit storage memory number (specifically "50"), t2 At the timing shown in FIG. 68(f), the hopper device 53 starts dispensing medals.

Here, in the normal process (FIG. 13), the medium provision process (step S315) is executed after the process corresponding to the end of the game (FIG. 29) including the AT process (FIG. 45) is executed, so the AT signal After the output state of is switched from HI level to LOW level and information corresponding to the OFF duration period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the OFF duration counter of the main side RAM 74, medals are paid out by the hopper device 53. is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the measurement of the OFF duration period progresses during the period in which the hopper device 53 is dispensing medals.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the payout of medals by the hopper device 53 ends as shown in FIG. 68(f). In this case, the external output setting process (FIG. 67) is executed on the condition that no freeze period is set in the normal process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process, as already explained, when the second output start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the value of the OFF continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, in step S3306 stand by. Therefore, the output state of the AT signal is maintained at the LOW level until the remainder of the OFF duration period has elapsed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the value of the OFF continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 68(h). In other words, the measurement of the OFF duration period is completed. Therefore, at the timing t4, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 68(g). Further, at the timing t4, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 68(a).

Next, a case will be described in which one set of AT state ST5 is continued in a situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), the game starts at timing t5, and as shown in FIG. 68(e), rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts at timing t5. Furthermore, since the current game is started in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is at the HI level as shown in FIG. 68(g).

Thereafter, at timing t6, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 68(e). In this case, since the value of the AT continuation counter after being subtracted by 1 in the AT process (FIG. 45) becomes "0", one set of the current AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 68(b). However, if the value of the set count counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, processing for starting one new set of AT state ST5 is executed. When the process for starting the 1 set is executed, an AT continuation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 in step S2315, but as shown in FIG. 68(d), the ending confirmation production is executed. Because of this situation, the set continuation effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 68(c). As a result, under the control of the main MPU 72, even if a new set of AT state ST5 is continued, the ending confirmation performance is continued without executing the corresponding performance, so the player is in the AT state. There is no recognition that one set of ST5 has been completed and a new set has been continued.

Furthermore, by executing the AT signal OFF setting process in step S2317, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 68(g). Furthermore, by executing the OFF continuation counter setting process in step S2318, the OFF continuation counter corresponds to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) as shown in FIG. 68(h) at timing t6. information is set. In addition, in this game, a prize corresponding to the provision of game media has been established, and the number of stored virtual medals has reached the upper limit storage memory number (specifically, "50"), so that t6 At the timing shown in FIG. 68(f), the hopper device 53 starts dispensing medals.

As mentioned above, in the normal process (FIG. 13), the medium provision process (step S315) is executed after the process corresponding to the end of the game (FIG. 29), which includes the AT process (FIG. 45), is executed, so the AT signal After the output state of is switched from HI level to LOW level and information corresponding to the OFF duration period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the OFF duration counter of the main side RAM 74, medals are paid out by the hopper device 53. is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the measurement of the OFF duration period progresses during the period in which the hopper device 53 is dispensing medals.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(f), at timing t7, when the hopper device 53 continues to pay out medals, the value of the OFF continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 changes to " 0”. In other words, the measurement of the OFF duration period is completed. However, in the normal process (FIG. 13), the medium attachment process (step S315) is still being executed and the external output setting process (FIG. 67) has not been executed, so the AT signal is Maintained at LOW level.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the dispensing of medals by the hopper device 53 ends as shown in FIG. 68(f). In this case, since the measurement of the OFF duration period has already been completed, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 68(g). Further, at the timing t8, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 68(a).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Based on the values of the AT continuation counter and the number of sets counter in AT state ST5, if the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied in the AT state ST5, the first ending flag or the second ending in the main side RAM 74 is set. The flag is set to "1". Then, when the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1", the ending confirmation effect or the ending effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied in the AT state ST5. In this case, even if the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1". Similarly to the situation, a process for adding on the remaining number of consecutive games in AT state ST5 and a process for adding on the remaining number of sets in AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, since there is no need to change the processing contents of these additional processing depending on whether "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the main MPU 72. becomes.

On the other hand, if the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the number of sets counter is added, the player will not receive a substantial profit. does not mean that it has been granted. On the other hand, if the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the freeze period, reverse push notification, and additional effects will not be executed due to the execution of additional processing. . As a result, it is possible to prevent a performance from being executed as if a profit has been given to the player, even though no profit has actually been given to the player.

In particular, by preventing the freeze period from occurring, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of gaming from decreasing due to the execution of add-on processing that does not substantially benefit the player.

If the first ending flag or second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", even if one set of AT state ST5 ends and a new set continues, the corresponding performance will be executed. Not done. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the ending confirmation performance or the ending performance.

When the AT state ST5 ends, an image of the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player can clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, the image of the transition waiting effect is continued until a new transition to the second section SC2 occurs. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player clearly recognize that the situation is after the AT state ST5 has ended and before the transition to the second section SC2 again, using the image of the transition wait effect. In addition, since the image of the transition waiting effect is simply continued to be displayed as is, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started and the partial clearing process (step S104) or all clearing process (step S105) is executed, an image is displayed when the first section SC1 is reached. The image of the transition waiting effect is not displayed on the device 63. Thereby, in the case of the first section SC1, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the situation is after the end of the AT state ST5.

Since the shift to the second section SC2 occurs based on winning one of the roles in the role lottery process (Figure 15) in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 is determined by the role lottery process. It becomes possible to relate to the results shown in (FIG. 15). In addition, in this configuration, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first period SC1 is repeated, the first period SC1 will continue. In the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5, the image of the transition waiting effect continues to be displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player is clearly aware that the first section SC1 continues. becomes possible.

In the first period SC1, each time a game is executed in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination processing (FIG. 15), the setting value set as the target of use indicates the expectation level that is in the high setting value range. An effect is performed that clearly indicates a setting value range that includes a setting value that is set as an effect or to be used. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by the execution of a game in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", either the first suggestion lottery table or the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table, whereas the non-transition continuous counter If the value is one of "3" to "5", one of the first suggestion lottery table, the second suggestion lottery table, and the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table. Therefore, the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is one of "3" to "5" is more likely to be set for use than the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2". This makes it easier to predict the possibility that the current setting value is in the high setting value range. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by repeated games in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

If the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, a suggestion lottery table that corresponds one-to-one to the setting value set as the target of use is read out, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and a setting suggestion command is issued. Among the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command, a command corresponding to a corresponding setting value range may be selected as a transmission target. As a result, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the lottery process (Figure 15) in the first section SC1 is repeated for six or more games, the setting value set as the target of use is It is possible to provide an opportunity to recognize which of the low setting value range, medium setting value range, and high setting value range the setting value corresponds to. Therefore, in the first section SC1, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage caused by repeated games in which no winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and it is possible to On the contrary, this can be advantageous for players who want to know in which setting value range the setting value falls.

When a transition occurs from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the number of unlocked games and the type of transition mode in the second section SC2 are determined, so the player is assured that the determined contents are advantageous. We will have to pay attention to whether it exists or not. In this case, the performance content of the transition performance to be executed when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed is determined in a determination manner corresponding to the advantageous degree of the second section SC2. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the advantage of the second section SC2 by using a transition effect to make the player recognize that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transition performance.

When a notification indicating that an addition of the set number of times has occurred during the addition period is executed, a relatively loud audio corresponding to the addition is output from the speaker 62 in order to enhance the production effect. In this case, if the audio corresponding to the addition is suddenly output in a situation where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been announced, the player who was surprised by it may mistakenly stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced during the add-on period, if an add-on win for the number of sets is achieved, a freeze period basically occurs in the middle under the control of the main MPU 72. As a result, even if the player is surprised by the voice that supports the addition, since the control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in response to the player's operations is blocked at that timing, it is possible that the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be incorrect. The characteristics are reduced.

The output of the additional audio is completed within the range in which the intermediate freeze period is being executed. This makes it possible to reliably disable the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in a situation where the audio corresponding to addition is being output.

In a configuration where the audio compatible with addition occurs at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, or the second stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the audio compatible with the addition If occurs at the start of the rotation, the midway freeze period occurs at the start of the rotation, and if the audio corresponding to the addition occurs at the first stop, the midway freeze period occurs at the first stop, and the audio corresponding to the addition occurs at the first stop. If this occurs at the second stop, the intermediate freeze period occurs at the second stop. In other words, since the midway freeze period starts immediately before the additional audio is output, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are disabled from occurring excessively.

In a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, an additional winning of the number of sets may occur. Even if the player is surprised by the output of the add-on sound in such a situation, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is arbitrary, so the player may end up making a mistake in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There isn't. Therefore, no intermediate freeze period occurs in this situation. This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are disabled from occurring excessively.

The type of production mode that corresponds to the corresponding image that is displayed furthest in the selection target mode image G2 at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated and the opportunity to start the game occurs is the type of production mode that will occur during this additional period. In this configuration, it is mistakenly assumed that by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or setting a bet by operating the credit input button 47, the type of performance mode corresponding to the corresponding image that is selected at that timing is determined. There is a possibility that some players will appear. Since the player mistakenly assumes that the type of performance mode has been determined at the time of setting the bet, the subsequent operation timing of the start lever 41 selects a type of performance mode that is different from the desired type of performance mode. There is a risk that the timing may be the target. In particular, if a bet is set and the start lever 41 is immediately operated when the remaining switching period for which the desired type of performance mode is selected, a type of performance mode different from the desired type of performance mode is selected. There is a high possibility that the production mode will be selected. On the other hand, at the timing when the bet is set, the remaining switching period for the performance mode of the type selected at that time is reset to the initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is an operation to determine the type of performance mode, it is possible to ensure that the desired type of performance mode can be determined as the performance mode for the current add-on period. becomes.

By having a configuration in which the remaining switching period for the type of production mode that is selected at that time is reset to the initial value at the timing when a bet is set, the fixed period for extending the remaining switching period can be set. Compared to a configuration in which addition is performed, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of information stored in advance.

By displaying the switching period image G3 indicating the remaining switching period, it becomes easier for the player to predict the timing at which the selected production mode will be switched. In this case, if the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value, the display content of the switching period image G3 is also changed in accordance with the reset. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the remaining switching period has been reset to the initial value.

When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, the process of setting the validity period flags 102a to 102c to "1" is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

In a situation where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, the stopping operation for the left reel 32L is generally performed first. Furthermore, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, if the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed first, the left stop button 42 is operated at a timing that will not cause a cherry prize to be missed. . As shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement in FIG. 28, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L so as not to miss a cherry prize, the maximum number of slides is 4, so the follow range The third "White 7" symbol to the thirteenth "Watermelon" symbol shown as can reach the lower row of the left reel 32L. In the configuration where the follow range is set in this way, the initial rotational position at which the corresponding reel index sensor 36 detects the sensor cut bang 37 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the reel 32L to which the 15th symbol corresponds. , 32M, and 32R. On the left reel 32L, this initial rotation position is the follow range and the non-follow range which is the range outside the follow range (0th "Watermelon" symbol to 2nd "Bell" symbol and 14th "Watermelon" symbol to This is a rotational position that is one symbol further downstream than the downstream boundary in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L among the boundaries with the 20th "Bell" symbol). The initial rotational position of the left reel 32L is a rotational position that is advanced one symbol downstream with respect to the downstream boundary between the follow range and the non-follow range in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L. As a result, if the left stop button 42 for the left reel 32L is operated so that any symbol included in the follow range stops at the lower position of the left reel 32L, when the next game starts, After the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed and the rotation speed is constant, the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L, and the operation of the left stop button 42 is enabled. That will happen. In a configuration in which the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is individually enabled when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after acceleration is completed, the left reel By setting the initial rotational position of the left reel 32L as described above, the operation of the left stop button 42 for the left reel 32L can be made effective at an early stage in a situation where the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed for the first time. It becomes possible.

When one set is continued in the AT state ST5, the output state of the AT signal is once switched from the HI level to the LOW level, and then switched from the LOW level to the HI level when the OFF duration period has elapsed. In this case, the process of switching the output state of the AT signal from the HI level to the LOW level and the process of starting the measurement of the OFF duration period are performed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, and the medium application process (step S315 ) is executed. Then, when the measurement of the OFF duration period is completed after the medium application process (step S315) is completed, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This makes it possible to measure the OFF duration including the period during which the hopper device 53 is dispensing medals, thereby shortening the period for waiting for the process to proceed until the OFF duration has elapsed. It becomes possible to do so.

The execution period of the medium provisioning process (step S315) may be longer than the OFF duration period. This makes it possible to create a situation in which there is virtually no processing waiting period until the OFF duration period elapses.

If a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 remains lit even in a situation where a new game can be started without setting a new bet. The light goes off from then on. When the credit input button 47 is operated, the light emitting sections 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 sequentially turn from the off state to the on state even if a new bet has not been set. . In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, This will be a special replay prize. In addition, in order to make a special replay win, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and also operate the left stop button 42 at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when a special replay winning is achieved, the player recognizes that the replay winning has actually been achieved, but the player has made a so-called replay failure. In this case, if the special replay winning is achieved as described above, each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 is temporarily switched from the lit state to the off state, and then when the credit input button 47 is operated. By sequentially switching each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 from an off state to a lit state, a so-called replay can be removed even when a replay winning has actually been achieved. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that.

When a special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, not only the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 are turned off, but also the credit input button 47 is switched from the turned off state to the lit state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay failure has occurred even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved.

When a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state and the credit input button 47 is operated after that, each light emitting section 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 is sequentially switched from the off state to the on state. Not only is the bet changed, but also a bet sound is output from the speaker 62. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay failure has occurred even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved.

If a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, and the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit input button 47, when the game is started based on this operation, the production side bet display section 69 All of the light emitting sections 69a to 69c are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a so-called replay has been omitted even in a situation where a replay win has actually been achieved as described above. All the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the bet display part 69 can be turned on.

In the configuration in which the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 are turned off when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting sections 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 is turned on. will be maintained. As a result, even if the situation is after a special replay winning has been achieved in the first half RT state, the administrator of the game hall can check the main side bet display section 64 and know that a bet on game media is being made. It becomes possible to clearly identify whether or not there is one.

If either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, even if you win with index value IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will be stored as a trigger for the winning. Since the processing by the program is set so that the data is not newly stored in the main side RAM 74, the winning lottery table is It is possible to prevent the BB winning data and the RB winning data from being stored cumulatively in the main side RAM 74 without changing the type of the winning data. By not changing the type of winning lottery table depending on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the winning lottery table can be drawn according to whether or not the winning data is stored. Since there is no need to prepare a table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the winning lottery table.

If either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, even if you win with index value IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will be stored as a trigger for the winning. Even if the data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV is 18 or 20 and the winning occurs. The cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the cherry winning data is selectively stored, and the probability that the cherry winning data is stored varies depending on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the details of the stepping motor control process executed by the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3401: NO), other processing is executed (step S3402). In the other processing, the same processing as steps S802 to S806 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

If the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3401: YES), the target reel counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3403). After that, other processing is executed (step S3404). In the other processing, the same processing as steps S808 to S812 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

If the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S3405: NO), the processes of steps S3406 to S3408 are executed. . The processing contents of steps S3406 to S3408 are the same as steps S814 to S816 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

If the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1" (step S3405: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S3409). The processing contents of the constant speed control processing are the same as step S817 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S3410). When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S3410: YES), "1" is set to the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. (Step S3411). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are enabled.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation has started is such that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if acceleration control is performed in this way, the difference will depend on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the process of steps S3410 and S3411, that is, the process of setting the valid period flags 102a to 102c to "1" when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, is for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R separately. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

Thereafter, it is determined whether all the valid period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1" (step S3412). If all the validity period flags 102a to 102c are set to "1" (step S3412: YES), button lighting processing is executed (step S3413). In the button transfer process, all stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from an off state to a on state. As a result, even in a configuration where the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated individually, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from the unlit state to the lit state is aligned after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. becomes possible.

The processing contents of steps S3414 to S3416 are the same as steps S822 to S824 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated individually, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from the unlit state to the lit state after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating It becomes possible to align the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable regarding the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 turn on.

<Third embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the details of the stepping motor control process executed by the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3501: NO), other processing is executed (step S3502). In the other processing, the same processing as steps S802 to S806 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

If the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3501: YES), the target reel counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3503). After that, other processing is executed (step S3504). In the other processing, the same processing as steps S808 to S812 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

If the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S3505: NO), the processes of steps S3506 to S3508 are executed. . The processing contents of steps S3506 to S3508 are the same as steps S814 to S816 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

If the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1" (step S3505: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S3509). The processing contents of the constant speed control processing are the same as step S817 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, on the condition that all acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1" (step S3510: YES), the reel index sensor of reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value 36, it is determined whether the sensor cut bang 37 is detected (step S3511). When the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S3511: YES), "1" is set to the valid period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. (Step S3512). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are enabled.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation has started is such that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if acceleration control is performed in this way, the difference will depend on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the process of steps S3511 and S3512, that is, the process of setting "1" to the valid period flags 102a to 102c when the sensor cut bang 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, is for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R separately. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

Furthermore, the processing in steps S3511 and S3512 is executed on the condition that all acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1". Therefore, even if the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop button will stop when the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. It is possible to enable buttons 42-44.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are already lit (step S3513). Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in the off state, basically the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 are in an off state. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S3513, and the button lighting process is executed (step S3514). In the button transfer process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are switched from an off state to a on state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is enabled are switched from the unlit state to the lit state in order, making it easier for the player to recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is enabled.

The processing contents of steps S3515 to S3517 are the same as steps S822 to S824 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the processing in steps S3511 and S3512 is executed on the condition that all acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c are set to "1". Therefore, even if the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop button will stop when the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. It is possible to enable buttons 42-44.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution conditions for setting suggestions in the first section SC1 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the termination control process in this embodiment executed by the production side MPU 92.

In steps S3601 to S3604, the same processes as steps S3001 to S3004 of the termination control process (FIG. 58) in the first embodiment are executed. If the second section initialization command has been received (step S3605: YES), various clearing processes are executed (step S3606). In the various clearing processes, various storage areas of the production side RAM 94 used in the AT state ST5, such as an ending flag, an ending execution flag, a first ending condition storage area, a second ending condition storage area, etc., are cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the after-second-section flag provided in the performance-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3607). The flag after the end of the second section is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the situation is after the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 have ended.

Thereafter, the data table of the transition waiting performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3608). The transition waiting effect data table is a table in which various data for executing a transition waiting effect indicating that the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is being waited for is set. The performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the transition waiting performance, so that the transition waiting performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Do it like this.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the production control process during non-AT in this embodiment executed by the production side MPU 92.

If any setting suggestion command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3701: YES), on the condition that the after-second-section flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3702: YES), the display table corresponding to the received setting suggestion command is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3703). The display table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting suggestion commands, and by reading the display table, a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the currently received setting suggestion command is added to the transition waiting effect. is executed. As already explained, on the image display device 63, a setting suggestion image corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time is additionally displayed in a situation where an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is being displayed.

If a setting suggestion command has not been received (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether a section transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3704). If the section transition command has been received (step S3704: YES), the flag after the end of the second section in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3705). After that, the processing from step S3706 to step S3710 is executed. Further, if the section transition command has not been received (step S3704: NO), the process of step S3711 is executed. In steps S3706 to S3711, the same processes as steps S3204 to S3209 of the production control process during non-AT (FIG. 63) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, on the condition that the AT state ST5 and the first section SC1 are after the second section SC2, which role will be selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1? If the shift to the second section SC2 does not occur due to the fact that the player did not win, the setting suggestion effect is executed. As a result, in the first section SC1, which occurs when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 15 ), it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being executed even if a game in which no winning role is won is executed.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing content of the additional period processing executed by the main MPU 72 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing processing for the additional period in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, a second additional lottery process is executed (step S3801). The processing contents of the second add-on lottery process are the same as step S2501 of the add-on period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment.

If one or more set times are selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S3802: YES), an addition process for the set times is executed (step S3803). In the set count addition process, the set count selected in the second additional lottery process (step S3801) is added to the set count counter in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=1 to 6 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) for the winning combination in the current game (step S3804). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, the intermediate freeze occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3805). Additionally, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3806). The processing contents of step S3805 and step S3806 are the same as step S2505 and step S2506 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, a lottery process for the occurrence timing is executed (step S3807). The contents of the lottery process for the occurrence timing are the same as step S2508 of the additional period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. If the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3808: YES), the start time occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3809). If the first stop timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3810: YES), the first stop occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3811). . If the second stop timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3810: NO), the second stop occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3812). . When the process of step S3809, the process of step S3811, or the process of step S3812 is executed, a freeze compatible winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3813). The effect when the processes from step S3807 to step S3813 are executed is the same as the effect when the process from step S2508 to step S2514 is executed in the additional period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. be.

If a negative determination is made in step S3804, it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=7 to 10 has been won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the current game (step S3814). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3814, a lottery process for the occurrence timing is executed (step S3815). The contents of the lottery process for the occurrence timing are the same as step S2508 of the additional period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. Then, it is determined whether the start timing has been selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3816).

If the start timing is selected (step S3816: YES), the midway freeze occurrence flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3817). Furthermore, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3818). The processing contents of these steps S3817 and S3818 are the same as steps S2505 and S2506 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. Further, the start time occurrence flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3819). Thereafter, a freeze compatible winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3813). As a result, on the condition that both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 are not set to "1", a freeze period is started before the current rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts. At the same time as this occurs, an effect indicating that the number of sets has been increased during the freeze period is executed.

On the other hand, in the lottery process of the winning combination in this game (FIG. 15), if none of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won (step S3814: NO), or if any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 has been won. If the first stop or the second stop is selected in the generation timing lottery process (step S3815) executed in response to winning (step S3816: NO), the non-freeze compatible winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92. (step S3820). The processing contents of the production side MPU 92 when receiving the non-freeze compatible winning command are the same as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if one of the index values IV=7 to 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3815). In this case, an effect indicating that an additional number of sets has occurred in a situation where a freeze period is occurring is executed, whereas in the lottery process for occurrence timing (step S3815), the timing at the first stop or If the second stop timing is selected, no freeze period occurs. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a freeze period does not occur even if one of the index values IV=7 to 10 is won and an additional number of sets occurs.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, after the ending flag of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" triggered by the transmission of one of the first ending command and the second ending command from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92. Even so, the production side MPU 92 determines whether or not the other of the first ending command and the second ending command has been received, and if the other command is received, the production control processing during AT (Fig. 56 ) may be configured such that the process of step S2908 is executed. As a result, even if, for example, the ending flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" triggered by the limited total net increase in the number of game media (that is, triggered by the reception of the second ending command), the second ending flag is set to "1". Even if the ending condition for the second section SC2 is satisfied, triggered by the number of consecutive games in the section SC2 (that is, triggered by the reception of the first ending command), the ending effect will be executed in response to it. It becomes possible to

(2) In each of the above embodiments, either the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the remaining number of consecutive games or remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 is If the additional processing to increase can be executed but the additional effect for it is not executed, the effect that suggests the setting value that is currently set to be used every time the additional processing is executed. It may also be configured to be executed. Effects that suggest setting values include effects that clearly indicate the settings that are currently set to be used, and effects that indicate that the settings that are currently set to be used are expected to fall within the high setting value range. Examples include. As a result, it is possible to provide a benefit of setting suggestion for winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in a situation where no profit is substantially provided even if the additional processing is executed.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, if either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the index value IV = 10 is won during the freeze period in the additional period. Although the configuration has been described in which all of the reverse push notification and additional effects are not executed in the case of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of them are not executed but some of them are executed. For example, the freeze period in the add-on period may not be executed, but the reverse push notification and the add-on performance in the case of winning the index value IV = 10 may be executed, and the freeze period in the add-on period is executed, but the index A configuration may also be adopted in which the reverse push notification and the additional effect when the value IV=10 is won are not executed.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when either the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed and the ending effect Regardless of the situation in which is being performed, the freeze period during the add-on period, the reverse push notification when the index value IV = 10 is won, and the add-on effect are all configured to not be executed, but the ending confirmation effect It may be configured such that the types of effects that are no longer executed are different depending on the situation where the ending effect is being executed and the situation where the ending effect is being executed. For example, in a situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, the freeze period in the additional period will not be executed, but the reverse push notification and the additional effect in the case of winning the index value IV = 10 will be executed, whereas the ending effect will be executed. In a situation where the bonus effect is being executed, the freeze period in the add-on period, the reverse push notification when the index value IV=10 is won, and the add-on effect may all be discontinued. This makes it possible to regulate the execution of performances in stages.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", one set of AT state ST5 is completed and a new set is started. Although the configuration has been described in which the corresponding effect is not executed even if the AT state ST5 is continued, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect corresponding to the completion of one set of AT state ST5 and the continuation of a new set may be executed. It may also be configured to be executed. In this case, the above continuous performance may be executed in the same manner regardless of whether "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74, When either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the side RAM 74 is set to "1", both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 are set to "1". The above continuous performance may be performed in a less conspicuous manner than when there is no continuous performance.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the game being executed in the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2, the image display device 63 waits for the transition. Although the configuration is such that the character images G21 to G23 corresponding to the setting suggestion effect are added to the image corresponding to the effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect on the image display device 63 is used. The setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the displayed content. For example, when a background image is displayed as an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect, a setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode of the background image.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the setting suggestion effect is executed by the game being executed in the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2. In addition to or in place of this, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance different from the setting suggestion performance is executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a premium performance is executed in which the occurrence of profit is determined when it occurs in the second section SC2. However, even if the premium effect occurs, no profit will be generated, so it is preferable that the premium effect is executed in a state where the player can recognize it.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power is started, the main side MPU 72 executes a partial clearing process (step S104) or a full clearing process (step S105), so that the game period is 1 section SC1, the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 and does not display the image corresponding to the first section SC1, but in this situation, the image display device The configuration may be such that an image corresponding to the first section SC1 is displayed at 63. In this case, in the first section SC1, which occurs when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the AT state ST5 and the second section Similarly to the first section SC1 after SC2 ends, the image display device 63 may be configured to display an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect, and furthermore, in the first section SC1, there is a game in which no winning role is won. A configuration may also be adopted in which, when executed, a setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, instead of this configuration, in the first section SC1, which occurs when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the AT state is Similar to the first section SC1 after ST5 and the second section SC2, an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, but in the first section SC1, there is a game in which no winning role is won. A configuration may also be adopted in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if it is executed. In addition, in the first section SC1, which occurs when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect and may be a different image, and an image indicating that it is the first section SC1 may be displayed on the image display device 63.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the transition wait effect is executed when the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 end, but the transition wait effect may not be executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which when the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 end, the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is started. Even in this case, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the first section SC1 is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is being executed. It may also be a configuration.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a game in which no winning combination is won in the first section SC1, the setting suggestion effect is surely executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first section SC1, when a game in which no winning combination is won, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and when a winning result is achieved in the setting suggestion lottery process, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Good too. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the setting suggestion lottery process increases as the number of games executed in the first section SC1 without transitioning to the second section SC2 increases. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of repeating the game in the first section SC1 without transitioning to the second section SC2.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, regardless of whether or not the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 ends, whether the first section SC1 occurs due to the AT state ST5 and the end of the second section SC2. In this case, when a game in which no winning role is won, the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second section SC2 ends when the ending condition is met. In the case of the first section SC1, which occurred due to this, if a game in which no winning role is won, the setting suggestion effect will be executed, but the second section SC2 ended without the ending condition being satisfied. In the first section SC1 that occurs, the setting suggestion performance may not be executed even if a game in which no winning combination is won is executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the ending condition being satisfied and the second section SC2 ending.

Also, the first section SC1, which occurred because the ending condition was satisfied and the second section SC2 ended, is better than the first section SC1, which occurred because the second section SC2 ended without the ending condition being satisfied. It may also be configured such that the probability that the setting suggestion effect is executed is high when a game in which no winning combination is won is executed, and the setting value suggestion effect is performed when a game in which no winning combination is won is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting suggestion performance is executed in a highly accurate manner.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the transition to the second section SC2 occurs when one of the winning combinations is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) executed in the first section SC1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the second section SC2 occurs when a predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) executed in the first section SC1. , a transition lottery process is executed by winning a predetermined role in the role lottery process (FIG. 15) executed in the first section SC1, and when a winning is achieved in the transition lottery process, the second section SC2 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a transition occurs.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, if the audio corresponding to the addition is output in a game where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, a freeze period occurs, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. Although the freeze period does not occur when the additional sound is output in a game where the order is not announced, the freeze period is not limited to this, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced. A configuration may also be adopted in which a freeze period occurs when the audio corresponding to the addition is output regardless of whether or not the audio is output.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, when the audio corresponding to the addition is output in a game where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, the audio corresponding to the addition is output in a situation where a freeze period occurs. Although the configuration has been described in which the output starts and then the output of the corresponding audio is completed, the output of the audio that can be added is started in a situation where a freeze period occurs, but the output of the audio that can be added is started. The freeze period may end while the corresponding audio is being output. As a result, at the timing when a player who was surprised by the sudden start of the output of the add-on compatible audio accidentally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled, and the add-on compatible audio is output. Since the freeze period is canceled during the process, it is possible to prevent the freeze period from becoming excessively long.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, when the addition of the set number of times occurs during the addition period and the addition compatible audio is output, the configuration is such that one type of additional compatible audio is always output, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of audio that can be added are set, and the audio that can be added that is to be output is changed according to the value of the number of times that the audio that can be added is set. In this case, it becomes possible to notify the player of the value of the set number of times that has been added based on the type of output compatible audio. In this configuration, a freeze period occurs when the first add-on sound, which has a relatively high volume among the plurality of types of add-on sound, is output in a game where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced. However, the freeze period does not occur when a second add-on compatible sound having a relatively low volume among the plurality of types of add-on compatible sounds is output in a game where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced. You can also use it as This makes it possible to prevent the freeze period from occurring excessively.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, if the credit input button 47 is operated during the selection period of the performance mode in the additional period, the remaining switching period for the selected performance mode is reset to the initial value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the credit input button 47 is operated, a predetermined fixed period is added to the remaining switching period for the selected production mode. It may also be a configuration. The predetermined fixed period may be longer or shorter than the initial value of the remaining switching period. When the predetermined fixed period is shorter than the remaining switching period, the remaining switching period of the production mode currently being selected is prevented from being extended for an excessively long period in response to the operation of the credit input button 47. It becomes possible to

(17) In each of the above embodiments, if the credit input button 47 is operated multiple times in a situation where one production mode is selected during the production mode selection period in the additional period, each time the credit input button 47 is Although the remaining switching period for which the production mode is selected is reset to the initial value, it is not limited to this, and credits may be inserted in a situation where the production mode is selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which an upper limit is set on the number of times the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value in response to the operation of the button 47. The upper limit may be set to one time, or the upper limit may be set to two or more times. This makes it possible to prevent the event in which the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value from being repeated excessively.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45 or the credit input button 47 is operated during the performance mode selection period in the additional period, the remaining switching period is Although the configuration is such that the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the credit input button 47 is operated, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value. The remaining switching period may not be reset to the initial value even if a medal is inserted, and the remaining switching period may be reset to the initial value when a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, but the remaining switching period may not be reset to the initial value even if a medal is inserted. The remaining switching period may not be reset to the initial value even if the button 47 is operated.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, if the credit input button 47 is operated during the performance mode selection period in the add-on period, the remaining switching period will be reset to the initial value on the condition that the game media is bet by that operation. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and when the credit input button 47 is operated, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value regardless of whether or not game media is bet. It may also be configured such that it is set. As a result, even after a replay winning has been established, even if the credit input button 47 is operated under the misunderstanding that the operation of the credit input button 47 corresponds to determining the type of performance mode, the remaining switching can be performed. The period will be reset to the initial value.

(20) As in the third embodiment, when the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 change from the unlit state to the lit state at the timing when all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled, as in the second embodiment. A switchable configuration may also be used.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, measurement for a predetermined period is started before the predetermined response process is executed, and if the measurement for the predetermined period is completed after the predetermined response process is executed, after the measurement is completed. Although the configuration for executing the process has been applied to the output control of the AT signal when a new set continues in the AT state ST5, the object to which the configuration is applied is not limited to the output control of the AT signal. For example, in a configuration in which the output state of the AT signal is HI level in AT state ST5 and the output state of the bonus signal is HI level in BB state ST2 or RB state ST3, BB state ST2 or RB state ST3 is If this occurs, the above configuration is configured to switch the output status of the bonus signal to the HI level when an output duration period (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed after first switching the output status of the AT signal to the LOW level. may be applied. Further, in a configuration in which a movable object for presentation is provided and execution of a process for ending the game is on standby while the movable object for presentation is operating for a predetermined presentation period, the predetermined A configuration may also be adopted in which medals can be paid out in the media provision process during the performance period.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, when a new set is continued in the AT state ST5, the output state of the AT signal is once switched to the LOW level and the OFF duration period is measured, and the medium application process (step S315) is performed. ) is executed, but in addition to or instead of the medium provision process (step S315), for example, when a new set is continued in AT state ST5, the freeze period is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). In a configuration in which this occurs, the freeze period may occur in a situation where the OFF duration period is being measured. In this case, if the freeze period is shorter than the OFF duration period, the measurement of the OFF duration period is completed if the sum of the processing period of the medium attachment process and the freeze period is equal to or greater than the OFF duration period. There is no processing waiting period.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, when the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 goes off, and then the credit input button 47 is operated. When the start lever 41 is operated without any warning, the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 are all turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the credit input button 47 Even if the start lever 41 is operated without being operated, the light-emitting sections 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 will turn on in sequence from the off state in the same way as when the credit input button 47 is operated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is switched.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display section 64 is maintained in a lit state, and each of the production side bet display section 69 is The light emitting sections 69a to 69c are turned off, and then the light emitting sections 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display section 69 are turned on.However, when a replay winning is established in this way, the main side bet display section 64 While maintaining the light emitting parts 64a to 64c in the lit state, the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 are turned off, and then the light emission parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display part 69 are turned on. The configuration may be applied when another replay winning is achieved. In this case, the other replay winnings may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to understand that a replay winning has been achieved compared to a normal replay winning.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when a replay winning is achieved, the lighting state of each of the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main side bet display part 64 is maintained as it is, but the invention is not limited to this. , even if a replay winning is achieved, the light emitting parts 64a to 64c of the main bet display section 64 are temporarily turned off, and after being maintained in the off state for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the replay is started. It may be configured such that the same number of light emitting units 64a to 64c as the number of games in which winnings are achieved are turned on. In this case, if a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state, both the main side bet display section 64 and the performance side bet display section 69 are temporarily turned off, and then when a predetermined period has elapsed, the main side bet The display section 64 may be returned to the lighting state, and when the credit input button 47 is operated, a medal is inserted, or the start lever 41 is operated, the performance side bet display section 69 may be returned to the lighting state.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, when a replay winning is achieved, the lighting state of each of the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the production side bet display section 69 remains unchanged, except when a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state described later. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and even if a replay winning is achieved, each light emitting part 69a to 69c of the performance side bet display part 69 is temporarily turned off, and the light emitting part 69a to 69c is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period ( For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the same number as the number of games in which the replay prize has been won are turned on after being kept in the off state for a period of 2 seconds). In this case, regardless of whether a special replay winning is achieved in the first half RT state or any other replay winning is achieved, the performance side bet display section 69 is temporarily turned off; When the credit input button 47 is operated, a medal is inserted, or the start lever 41 is operated, the performance side bet display section 69 returns to the lighting state, and if the latter, the performance side bet display section 69 returns to the lighting state when a predetermined period of time has passed thereafter. The bet display section 69 may be configured to return to the lighting state.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18 to 21, the corresponding Although the configuration is such that the BB winning data or the RB winning data is not newly stored in the main side RAM 74 upon winning, the invention is not limited to this, and either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. If the winner is won with index value IV = 18 to 21 in the above situation, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will not be newly stored in the main side RAM 74 as a result of the winning. A configuration may also be adopted in which another benefit is given to the player. In order to provide the other benefit, for example, a lottery process for transitioning to AT state ST5 may be executed in a manner specific to the situation, or a setting suggestion performance may be executed, and the setting suggestion performance may be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the item is won.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the AT state ST5 ends, the second section SC2 definitely ends and becomes the first section SC1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT state A configuration may also be adopted in which the second section SC2 can continue as it is even if ST5 ends. For example, if the number of consecutive games in the second section SC2 when AT state ST5 ends is less than or equal to the maintenance standard number of games (for example, 500 games), or when the AT state ST5 ends, the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media If the number of tickets is less than the maintenance standard number (for example, 500 tickets), the second section SC2 may be maintained as it is, and if the maintenance lottery process is executed when the AT state ST5 ends, the winner is retained. Alternatively, the second section SC2 may be maintained as it is. In the case where the second section SC2 is maintained even if the AT state ST5 ends, the configuration may be such that a performance different from the transition waiting performance is executed when the AT state ST5 ends, and the AT state ST5 ends. A configuration may also be adopted in which a transition wait effect is executed in the event of a transition. If the configuration is such that the transition waiting effect is executed when the AT state ST5 ends, the transition waiting effect will be executed if a game in which one of the winning roles is won is executed in a situation where the transition waiting effect is being executed. By configuring the transition performance to be executed after the performance ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the second section SC2 continues as it is when the AT state ST5 ends.

(29) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one main line ML, and may be a configuration in which there are two, three, or four or more effective lines. In this case, it may be configured such that the number of active lines increases as the number of game media bet is large, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of game media bet.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small win is achieved, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration is such that some privileges are granted to the player. That's fine. For example, it may be configured to pay out prizes other than medals when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(31) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, a C type, a combination type of A type and C type, a combination type of B type and C type, and also an RT game, a CT game, or an AT game. The present invention may be applied to any type of slot machine, such as a type equipped with. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(32) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. Further, it is possible to form a pattern using light, color, etc., a pattern may be formed using a three-dimensional shape, or a combination of these may form a pattern. That is, the pattern may be any pattern as long as it has a function as information with distinctiveness.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example was shown regarding the slot machine 10, but it may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played using game balls as a game medium, and the slot machine and pachinko The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of the above and the other machines.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantage transition means (processing of steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous shift is possible. ) and
Continuation standard measuring means (AT continuation counter and number of sets counter in the main side RAM 74) used to specify the remaining continuation standard number (remaining number of consecutive games, remaining number of sets) in the advantageous gaming state; ,
A first advantageous termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the remaining continuation reference number becomes "0" as the game is executed (a function that executes the processing of steps S2319 to S2321 in the main MPU 72) and,
Based on the fact that the game is executed in the advantageous transfer possible situation, the situation corresponding information (the number of continuous games, the limited total number of net additions of game media) in the situation corresponding storage means (number of continuous games counter 74c, total number of acquisitions counter 74d) is stored. Information updating means to be updated (a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of steps S1907 to S1912 in the main MPU 72),
Situation terminating means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation based on the situation corresponding information becoming the terminating reference information (upper limit number of games, upper limit net increase number) (function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) and,
When the advantageous transfer possible situation is terminated by the situation termination means, a second advantageous termination means (step in the main MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous gaming state even if the remaining continuation reference number is not "0" function to execute the process of S1914),
The continuation standard measuring means is configured to increase the remaining continuation standard number based on the occurrence of a top-up opportunity (win to transition to the top-up period, win at index value IV=10, top-up win) in the advantageous gaming state. Addition execution means (step S2205, step S2209, step S2213, and step S2503 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the addition processing (processing in steps S2205, step S2209, step S2213, and step S2503 in the main side MPU 72) for updating information function) and
Additional effect control means (step S312, step S317, step S720 in the main side MPU 72, A function to execute the processing of steps S2206, step S2210, step S2214, step S2514, step S2515, step S2809 and step S2810, production mode selection processing in the production side MPU 92, production control processing during the add-on period, and processing of step S2905. function) and
When the remaining continuation reference number reaches a number where the situation corresponding information can become the termination reference information, a predetermined restriction situation is established in which the addition processing can be executed but the additional performance is not executed. Situation generation means (function to execute the processing of steps S308, step S316, step S716, step S2703, step S2704, step S2707, step S2708 and step S2808 in the main side MPU 72, and the function to execute the processing of step S2901 and step S2907 in the production side MPU 92) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state may occur when the situation is such that an advantageous transition is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous gaming state should not expect a situation where an advantageous transition is possible. Become. In addition, if the situation response information updated based on the game being executed in a situation where advantageous transfer is possible becomes the termination criterion information, the situation where advantageous transfer is possible ends, and if the situation where advantageous transfer is possible ends, the remaining The advantageous gaming state ends even if the continuation reference number is not "0". This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. Furthermore, when an add-on process that increases the remaining continuation reference number is executed in an advantageous gaming state, an add-on effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's sense of satisfaction when the remaining continuation reference number increases. becomes possible.

In this case, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state is such that the situational information of the situation where advantageous transition is possible can be used as the termination reference information, the additional processing may be executed, but the additional effect will not be executed. A predetermined restriction situation occurs. In the predetermined limited situation, even if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state increases further, it will not substantially benefit the player, but even in this situation, the execution of the add-on processing should not be prevented. As a result, it is not necessary to switch between a situation in which the additional processing is executed and a situation in which it is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in program capacity. On the other hand, in a predetermined restriction situation, even if the processing for top-up is executed, the top-up effect will not be executed, so the player will not be made aware that the top-up for the remaining continuation standard number has occurred, which does not actually benefit the player. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform processing for advancing the game.

Feature A2. Means for starting a specific performance (ending finalization performance) when the remaining continuation standard number reaches such a level that the situation corresponding information can become the termination standard information (processing of step S2910 in the performance side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature A2, when the remaining continuation reference number in an advantageous gaming state reaches a number that can be used as the end standard information of the situation where advantageous transfer is possible, a specific performance is executed. It becomes possible to make the player aware that the situation response information can serve as the termination criterion information. In this case, in this situation, even if the processing for top-up is executed, there will be a predetermined restriction situation in which the top-up effect will not be executed, so it will be possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect, and it will actually be possible to It becomes possible to prevent the player from recognizing that an addition of the remaining continuation reference number that does not result in profit has occurred.

Feature A3. The remaining continuation reference number is the number in which the situation correspondence information can become the termination standard information, and when the situation correspondence information reaches the predetermined standard information before reaching the termination standard information, the pre-termination performance ( The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S2912 and step S2918 in the production side MPU 92) for causing the ending production to start.

According to feature A3, the situation correspondence information of a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible can become the termination standard information, and if the situation correspondence information becomes predetermined standard information before reaching the termination standard information, the pre-termination effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation will soon reach the termination criterion information. In this case, in this situation, even if the processing for top-up is executed, there will be a predetermined restriction situation in which the top-up effect will not be executed, so it will be possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect, and it will actually be possible to It becomes possible to prevent the player from recognizing that an addition of the remaining continuation reference number that does not result in profit has occurred.

Feature A4. means (main side A function of executing the process of step S2315 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein in the predetermined restriction situation, even if one set of the advantageous gaming state ends and a new set continues, the continuous performance is not executed.

According to feature A4, in a predetermined limited situation, even if one set of advantageous gaming states is completed and a new set is continued, the continuation effect is not executed. As a result, if the configuration of feature A2 is provided, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific performance, and if the configuration of feature A3 is provided, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the pre-end performance. It is possible to increase the degree of

Feature A5. The game according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the additional performance control means executes, as the additional performance, a progress stop performance (freeze period) that stops the progress of the game in response to a player's operation. Machine.

According to feature A5, since the progress stop effect is executed as an additional effect, it becomes possible to make the player clearly aware that the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state has increased. In this case, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state reaches a number that can be used as the end reference information of the situation where advantageous transition is possible, the progress stop effect will not be executed even if the add-on process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the playing efficiency from decreasing due to the execution of the add-on processing that does not substantially benefit the player.

Feature A6. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means;
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
Equipped with
As a role that can be won in the lottery process for the role, the first stop result (the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the center A "white 7" symbol is displayed on the reel 32M and a "red 7" symbol is displayed on the right reel 32R, and the first prescribed prize (special bell prize) is established, and the stop operation means is activated in the second stop operation mode (sequential press). A predetermined combination (index value IV = 10) is set in which the second stop result (combination of "bell" symbols) is displayed based on the operation and the second predetermined prize (first bell prize) is established. ,
The top-up effect control means operates the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode as the top-up effect when the top-up process is executed in a game in which the predetermined role is won in the role lottery process. A first notification (reverse push notification) that allows the player to recognize what to do is executed,
The present gaming machine is configured to enable a player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop operation mode when the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination in the predetermined restriction situation. Any one of features A1 to A5 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S2811 and step S2812 in the main side MPU 72) for executing 2 notification (sequential push notification). The game machine described.

According to feature A6, when the add-on process is executed in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won, the first notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop operation mode is provided. When the game is executed and the player operates the stop operation means in accordance with the first notification, the first stop result is displayed and the first predetermined prize is established. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state has increased by using the winning result. On the other hand, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state is such that the situation correspondence information of the situation where advantageous transition is possible can be used as the termination reference information, even if the additional processing is executed in a game in which a predetermined combination has been won, A second notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop operation mode instead of the first notification is executed, and the player operates the stop operation means in accordance with the second notification. As a result, the second stop result is displayed and the second predetermined prize is established. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined prize from being established in response to the execution of the add-on processing that does not substantially benefit the player.

Feature A7. The situation correspondence information is based on the total number of game media awarded by the game executed when the advantageous transfer possible situation continues, and the information is calculated based on the total number of game media awarded in the game executed when the advantageous transfer possible situation continues. When the predetermined difference is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed, the minimum value of the predetermined difference is taken as a predetermined reference value, and information on the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a limited total net increase in number of gaming media.

According to feature A7, the advantageous transfer possible situation is terminated based on the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transfer possible situation reaching the termination standard information, so that the advantageous transfer possible situation is excessively It is possible to prevent this from continuing for a long time. In this case, the excellent effects described above can be achieved.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the situation correspondence information is information on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature A8, the advantageous transferable situation ends based on the number of games played in the advantageous transferable situation reaching the termination criterion information, so the advantageous transferable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, the excellent effects described above can be achieved.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantage transition means (processing of steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous shift is possible. ) and
A first advantageous termination means (main side MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous gaming condition based on the occurrence of a state termination trigger (both the AT continuation counter and the set number counter of the main side RAM 74 are "0") in the advantageous gaming condition; (a function to execute the processing of steps S2319 to S2321);
a first situation ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) that ends the advantageous transfer possible situation based on the occurrence of a situation termination opportunity (establishment of an ending condition) in the advantageous transfer possible situation; ,
When the advantageous transfer possible situation is ended by the first situation ending means, a second advantageous ending means (processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) ends the advantageous gaming state even if the state ending opportunity has not occurred. ) and
When the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous termination means, a second situation termination means (step S1902 to step S1902 in the main MPU 72 A function to execute the processes of S1904, S1914, S2319, and S2320);
When the advantageous gaming state ends, the display means (image display device 63) performs an end correspondence display (transition waiting effect), and the termination correspondence display is continued until the advantageous shift possible situation is newly set. A corresponding display execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3007 in the production side MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state may occur when the situation is such that an advantageous transition is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous gaming state should not expect a situation where an advantageous transition is possible. Become. Further, the advantageous transferable situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, and when the advantageous transferable situation ends, the advantageous gaming state ends even if the state end opportunity does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. Furthermore, if an opportunity to end the situation occurs and the advantageous gaming state ends, the situation in which advantageous transition is possible can end even if the opportunity to end the situation has not occurred. It becomes possible to allow the situation to end.

In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, a display corresponding to the end is displayed on the display means, so that it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous gaming state has ended. Further, this termination correspondence display continues until a new advantageous transfer possible situation is set. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the player aware of the situation after the advantageous gaming state has ended but before the situation is set again to the advantageous shift possible situation by using the end correspondence display. , it is possible to achieve such excellent effects while reducing the processing load because the end-compatible display is simply continued to be displayed.

Feature B2. When the information erasing process (processing in steps S104 and S105 of the main MPU 72) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, if the situation is not one in which advantageous transition is possible, the display means The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the termination correspondence display is not performed.

According to feature B2, when the supply of operating power is started and the information erasure process is executed and the situation is not one in which advantageous transfer is possible, the display means does not display the termination response. Therefore, when the situation is not one in which an advantageous transition is possible, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the situation is a situation after the end of an advantageous gaming state.

Feature B3. Feature B1 or B2 characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transfer possible situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery processing of the winning combination (processing in step S307 of the main side MPU 72). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature B3, since the situation where an advantageous transfer is possible is set based on winning one of the winning roles in the winning combination lottery process in a situation where the situation is not an advantageous transfer possible situation, the opportunity for setting the advantageous transfer possible situation is determined by the role. It becomes possible to associate it with the result of the lottery process. In addition, in this configuration, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the lottery process is repeated in a situation where an advantageous transition is not possible, the situation will continue, but the situation will continue. In the situation after the end of the game, the end correspondence display continues, so it is possible to make the player clearly aware that the situation continues.

Feature B4. The termination correspondence display execution means executes at least part of the termination correspondence display based on the fact that the game is executed without a new setting to the advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends. It is equipped with a content changing means (a function of executing the process of step S3103 and step S3104 in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the production side MPU 92) for changing the display content (character images G21 to G23). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to feature B4, the display contents of at least a portion of the end response display change based on the fact that the game is executed without a new setting to an advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends. Therefore, even if the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where advantageous transition is not possible, it is possible to change the display contents of the display means, and to prevent the degree of attention to the game from decreasing. becomes possible.

Feature B5. A setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The content changing means is a set value corresponding means for determining the display content of at least a part of the end corresponding display in a determination manner according to the set value set as the target of use when changing the display content of at least a part of the end corresponding display. (The function of executing the process of step S3103 in the main side MPU 72) The gaming machine according to feature B4.

According to feature B5, the display contents of at least a part of the end correspondence display are changed based on the fact that the game is executed without a new setting to an advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends. In this case, the display content is determined in a manner that corresponds to the setting value set as the target of use. That is, when a game is executed in a situation where an advantageous transition is not possible after the end of an advantageous gaming state, a setting suggestion is made for the game. This makes it possible to treat the fact that the game is executed in a situation where no advantageous transition is possible, not as a disadvantage, but as an event that is beneficial to the player.

Feature B6. The set value corresponding means changes the display contents of at least a portion of the end correspondence display so that a new transition to the advantageous shift possible situation occurs after the advantageous gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the setting value set as the target to be used is determined in a manner that makes it easier for the player to predict the setting value as the number of games executed without any error increases.

According to feature B6, the more the game is repeatedly executed without making a new setting to the advantageous shift possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends, the more the setting suggestion in the end correspondence display predicts the setting value for the player. It becomes easier to do. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where advantageous transition is not possible.

Feature B7. a determining means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1804 to S1807 in the main MPU 72) for determining the advantageousness (number of games to be released, transition mode) of the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous transition possible situation is set; ,
A transition compatible performance execution means (a function that executes the processing of steps S3204 to S3208 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a transition compatible performance (transition performance) when the advantageous transition possible situation is set;
Equipped with
The transition compatible performance execution means is a means for determining the performance content of the transition compatible performance (executes the processing of steps S3204 to S3207 in the performance side MPU 92) in a determination manner corresponding to the advantage determined by the determining unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following functions.

According to feature B7, when an advantageous transferable situation is set, the advantageousness of the advantageous transferable situation is determined, so the player pays attention to the determined advantageousness. In this case, the performance content of the transition compatible performance executed when the advantageous transition possible situation is set is determined in a determination manner corresponding to the advantageousness of the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of advantage of the advantageous transferable situation by using a transition response effect for making the player recognize that the advantageous transferable situation has been newly set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transition compatible performance.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to each of the features of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing for advancing the game needs to be performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantage transition means (processing of steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous shift is possible. ) and
A first advantageous termination means (main side MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous gaming condition based on the occurrence of a state termination trigger (both the AT continuation counter and the set number counter of the main side RAM 74 are "0") in the advantageous gaming condition; (a function to execute the processing of steps S2319 to S2321);
a first situation ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) that ends the advantageous transfer possible situation based on the occurrence of a situation termination opportunity (establishment of an ending condition) in the advantageous transfer possible situation; ,
When the advantageous transfer possible situation is ended by the first situation ending means, a second advantageous ending means (processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) ends the advantageous gaming state even if the state ending opportunity has not occurred. ) and
When the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous termination means, a second situation termination means (step S1902 to step S1902 in the main MPU 72 A function to execute the processes of S1904, S1914, S2319, and S2320);
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect (character images G21 to G23) based on the fact that the game has been executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state has ended. (Function to execute the process of step S3103 and step S3104 in the main side MPU 72, function to execute the process of step S3202 in the production side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The special performance execution means includes a set value corresponding means (a function for executing the process of step S3103 in the main MPU 72) that determines the performance content of the special performance in a determination manner according to the set value set as the target of use. ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state may occur when the situation is such that an advantageous transition is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous gaming state should not expect a situation where an advantageous transition is possible. Become. Further, the advantageous transferable situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, and when the advantageous transferable situation ends, the advantageous gaming state ends even if the state end opportunity does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. Furthermore, if an opportunity to end the situation occurs and the advantageous gaming state ends, the situation in which advantageous transition is possible can end even if the opportunity to end the situation has not occurred. It becomes possible to allow the situation to end.

In this case, if a special effect is executed based on the game being executed without a new setting to an advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state has ended, the contents of the special effect will be It is determined in a manner that corresponds to the setting value set as the target of use. That is, when a game is executed in a situation where an advantageous transition is not possible after the end of an advantageous gaming state, a setting suggestion is made for the game. This makes it possible to treat the fact that the game is executed in a situation where no advantageous transition is possible, not as a disadvantage, but as an event that is beneficial to the player.

Feature C2. The set value corresponding means adjusts the performance content of the special performance to the target of use as the number of games executed without a new transition to the advantageous transition possible situation increases after the advantageous gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the setting value is determined in a manner that makes it easy for the player to predict.

According to feature C2, the more the game is repeatedly executed without making a new setting to an advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends, the more the setting suggestion in the special performance becomes more predictive of the setting value for the player. It becomes easy. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where advantageous transition is not possible.

Feature C3. Feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transfer possible situation based on winning one of the winning combinations in the lottery processing for winning combinations (processing in step S307 of the main side MPU 72). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature C3, since the situation where an advantageous transfer is possible is set based on winning one of the winning combinations in the lottery process in a situation where the situation is not an advantageous transfer possible situation, the opportunity for setting the advantageous transfer possible situation is set as the opportunity for setting the advantageous transfer possible situation. It becomes possible to associate it with the result of the lottery process. In addition, in this configuration, if a game in which no winning combination is won in the lottery process is repeated in a situation where an advantageous transition is not possible, the situation will continue, but the situation will continue. In the situation after the end of the game, a special performance including the contents of the setting suggestion is executed, so that even if the situation continues, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged.

Feature C4. a determining means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1804 to S1807 in the main MPU 72) for determining the advantageousness (number of games to be released, transition mode) of the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous transition possible situation is set; ,
A transition compatible performance execution means (a function that executes the processing of steps S3204 to S3208 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a transition compatible performance (transition performance) when the advantageous transition possible situation is set;
Equipped with
The transition compatible performance execution means is a means for determining the performance content of the transition compatible performance (executes the processing of steps S3204 to S3207 in the performance side MPU 92) in a determination manner corresponding to the advantage determined by the determining unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following functions.

According to feature C4, when an advantageous transferable situation is set, the advantageous degree of the advantageous transferable situation is determined, so the player pays attention to the determined advantageous degree. In this case, the performance content of the transition compatible performance executed when the advantageous transition possible situation is set is determined in a determination manner corresponding to the advantageousness of the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of advantage of the advantageous transferable situation by using a transition response effect for making the player recognize that the advantageous transferable situation has been newly set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transition compatible performance.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group C, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means;
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
When a specific winning combination (index value IV=1 to 10) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination, a specific notification (push) that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop operation mode is provided. specific notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2802, S2803, S2805, S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the main MPU 72),
A predetermined effect execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2618 in the effect-side MPU 92) that causes the predetermined effect (additional corresponding sound) to be executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (process of step S2503) occurs;
When the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the specific notification is executed, a stop restriction that prevents the variable display of the picture from being stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means before the predetermined effect is executed. A stop restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S312, step S720, and steps S2505 to S2514 in the main MPU 72) that generates the situation (freeze period);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, by executing a specific notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop operation mode when winning a specific combination, the player can understand the specific notification. By operating the stop operation means according to the contents, it is possible to win a prize corresponding to a specific winning combination. In this case, if a predetermined effect is executed in a situation where a specific notification is being executed, a stop restriction situation in which the display of changing patterns is not stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means before the predetermined effect is executed. occurs. As a result, even if the stop operation means is operated in a stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode according to the content of the specific notification due to focusing on the predetermined effect, the corresponding stop control will be executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, the game can be played suitably.

Feature D2. When the stop restriction generating means generates the stop restriction situation before the predetermined performance is executed, the stop restriction generating means causes the stop restriction situation to be canceled at a timing after the timing when the predetermined performance ends. The gaming machine described in D1.

According to feature D2, if the stop restriction situation occurs before the predetermined performance is executed, the stop restriction situation is canceled at a timing after the timing when the predetermined performance ends. This makes it possible to invalidate the operation of the stop operation means in a situation where a predetermined effect is being executed.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the stop restriction generation means does not generate the stop restriction situation when the predetermined performance is performed in a situation where the specific notification is not performed.

According to feature D3, when a predetermined effect is executed in a situation where a specific notification is not executed, a stop restriction situation does not occur, so situations in which the operation of the stop operation means is disabled occur excessively. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature D4. When the specific role is won in the lottery process for the role, if the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop operation mode, a specific win (first bell win, second bell win) is achieved, The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that a profit (granting of gaming media) is provided.

According to feature D4, in a configuration in which a specific winning is achieved and a specific profit is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop operation mode when a specific winning combination is won, a specific notification is executed. When the predetermined effect is executed in , before the predetermined effect is executed, a stop restriction situation occurs in which the variable display of the pattern is not stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. As a result, even if the stop operation means is operated in a stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode according to the content of the specific notification due to focusing on the predetermined effect, the corresponding stop control will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a specific profit will not be awarded even if a specific notification is executed when a specific winning combination is won. .

Feature D5. The symbol display means includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display the symbols in a variable manner,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the specific stop operation mode is such that the stop order of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas is a specific stop order.

According to feature D5, in a configuration in which the specific stop operation mode is such that the order of stopping the variable display of the symbols is the specific stop order, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature D6. The timing at which the predetermined effect is executed includes a predetermined timing that is a timing after the variable display of the picture is stopped in the variable display area whose stop order is a predetermined order among the plurality of variable display areas. ,
When the predetermined performance is executed at the predetermined timing, the stop restriction generating means is configured to perform the stop restriction generating means after the variable display of the symbols in the variable display area in the predetermined order is stopped and before the predetermined timing. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which generates a stop restriction situation.

According to feature D6, since the stop restriction situation is started immediately before the predetermined performance occurs, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated from occurring excessively.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A period measuring means (performance control counter of the performance side RAM 94) used to measure a predetermined selection period (remaining switching period);
The predetermined content to be selected from among a plurality of types of predetermined content (production mode) is set, and each time the measurement of the predetermined selection period measured by the period measuring means is completed, the selection target is selected in a predetermined order. a selection target setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2418 to S2421 in the production side MPU 92) for switching the predetermined contents;
A predetermined content determining means (step S2416 in the production side MPU 92) which sets the predetermined content selected as the selection target by the selection target setting means at the timing when the predetermined operation means (start lever 41) is operated by the player as the determination target content. function) and
A period for extending the period required to complete measurement of the predetermined selection period measured at that time by the period measuring means based on the operation of the specific operation means (credit input button 47) by the player. An extension means (a function of executing the process of step S2413 in the production side MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, each time the measurement of the predetermined selection period is completed, the predetermined contents to be selected are switched according to a predetermined order, and the predetermined contents to be selected are switched at the timing when the predetermined operation means is operated by the player. This is the content to be determined. Thereby, the player can make the desired predetermined content the content to be determined by operating the predetermined operation means at the timing when the desired predetermined content is the selection target. In this case, based on the specific operation means being operated by the player, the period required for the period measurement means to complete measurement of the predetermined selection period measured at that time is extended. This prevents cases in which the player mistakenly operates the specific operation means in order to set the predetermined content that is currently the selection target as the content to be determined, and then realizes this and operates the predetermined operation means in a hurry. Even if the predetermined content is selected at that time, there is a high possibility that the predetermined content to be selected at that time is the predetermined content to be selected at the timing when the specific operation means was operated. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the selection operation by the player is performed suitably.

Feature E2. The period extension means is configured to cause the period measuring means to extend the predetermined selected period even if the period measuring means is in the middle of measuring the predetermined selected period based on the operation of the specific operation means by the player. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein: is newly measured.

According to feature E2, when the specific operation means is operated, the period measurement means newly starts measuring the predetermined selection period, so that a period different from the predetermined selection period is used to extend the predetermined selection period. There is no need to prepare this information in advance.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the predetermined operation means and the specific operation means are both operation means operated to start a game.

According to feature E3, since both the predetermined operation means and the specific operation means are operation means operated to start the game, the specific operation rather than the predetermined operation means is used as the operation means for selecting the desired predetermined content. Although there is a possibility that the means may be manipulated, by having the configuration of feature E1 described above, even if such an event occurs, it is possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature E4. The specific operation means is an operation means operated to bet a gaming value,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined operating means is an operating means operated to start a game in a situation where the gaming value is bet.

According to feature E4, the specific operation means is an operation means operated to bet a gaming value, and the predetermined operation means is an operation means operated to start a game in a situation where a gaming value is bet. Therefore, there is a possibility that the specific operation means is operated instead of the predetermined operation means as the operation means for selecting the desired predetermined content, and the predetermined operation means is operated immediately after that. By having this configuration, even if such an event occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature E5. Period display means (processing of step S2407 in the production side MPU 92) for displaying a period display (switching period image G3) that allows the player to recognize the period required for the measurement of the predetermined selection period by the period measurement means to complete. functions),
The period display means is a means for changing the display contents of the period display in accordance with the extension when the period required to complete measurement of the predetermined selection period is extended by the period extension means (a means for changing the display contents of the period display in accordance with the extension). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2414.

According to feature E5, by displaying a period, it becomes easier for the player to predict the timing at which the predetermined content of the selection target will be changed. In this case, if the predetermined selection period is extended, the display contents of the period display will be changed to match the extension, so it is possible to make the player clearly aware that the predetermined selection period has been extended. Become.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. a symbol display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display symbols in a variable manner;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the patterns in the corresponding variable display areas;
The variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbols in the corresponding variable display areas is started based on the operation of the stop operation means. a symbol display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the symbol display means so that the symbol display means is stopped;
Equipped with
The picture display control means is
Acceleration control means (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 executes the processing of step S814 (in the second embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S3406 in the main side MPU 72, in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3506 in the main side MPU 72),
When it is determined that the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area in which the acceleration by the acceleration control means has been completed has reached the predetermined reference position (the position where the reel index sensor 36 is turned ON), the other variation is determined. Even if it is not specified that the fluctuating display of a picture in the display area has reached a predetermined reference position, it is possible to execute stop control for the fluctuating display of a picture in a predetermined fluctuating display area by operating the stop operation means. Stop enable setting means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S819 in the MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3411 in the MPU 72, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3512 in the MPU 72) functions) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled when the variable display position of the pattern reaches a predetermined reference position after acceleration is completed, so that the operation of the stop operation means is enabled in the situation after acceleration is completed. It becomes possible to enable the operation of the stop operation means in a situation where the variable display position of the pattern can be grasped based on the predetermined reference position. In this case, if it is determined that the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area that has completed acceleration has become the predetermined reference position, the variable display position of the symbol in the other variable display area has become the predetermined reference position. Even if this is not specified, it is possible to execute stop control by operating the stop operation means for the variable display of the picture in the predetermined variable display area. As a result, in a configuration where the operation of the stop operation means is enabled in a situation where the fluctuating display position of the pattern can be grasped based on the predetermined reference position in the situation after acceleration is completed as described above, the operation of the stop operation means can be performed. This makes it possible to activate the system at an early stage. Therefore, the game can be played suitably.

Feature F2. The stop enable setting means specifies that the variable display position of the picture in the predetermined variable display area has reached a predetermined reference position in a situation in which acceleration by the acceleration control means has been completed for all of the plurality of variable display areas. In this case, even if it is not specified that the variable display of the symbol in the other variable display area has reached the predetermined reference position, the variable display of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area is stopped by operating the stop operation means. The gaming machine according to feature F1 is characterized in that it is possible to execute control.

According to feature F2, even if it is specified that the acceleration for a predetermined variable display area is completed and the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area has become the predetermined reference position, the In a situation where acceleration has not been completed for all, the operation of the stop operation means corresponding to the predetermined variable display area is not enabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stop control of the fluctuating display of a picture from starting in a predetermined fluctuating display area even though the acceleration of the fluctuating display of a picture in a part of the fluctuating display area has not been completed. It becomes possible.

Feature F3. After the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas has started, if it is possible to execute stop control by operating the stop operation means for all of the plurality of variable display areas, means for changing the state of the light emitting means provided in each of the stop operation means to a state corresponding to the stop operation (in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3412 and step S3413 in the main MPU 72); The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2.

According to feature F3, in a configuration in which the operation of the stop operation means is individually activated for each of a plurality of variable display areas, the operation of the stop operation means is activated for all the variable display areas. In this case, the state of the light emitting means provided in each of the stop operation means becomes a state corresponding to the stop operation possible. This makes it possible to align the timing at which the state of the light-emitting means of the stop operation means becomes the state corresponding to the state in which the stop operation is possible, and the player is informed that the stop operation order is notified by switching the state of the light-emitting means. This makes it possible to avoid misunderstandings.

Feature F4. A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning combination lottery process when the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means;
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
Equipped with
If the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area is in the first range, the operation timing of the stop operation means is such that a winning is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is the operation timing that enables the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined winning combination (index value IV=13), which corresponds to the case where the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area is within the second range. When the stop operation means is operated, the operation timing of the stop operation means is an operation timing that disables the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination won in the lottery process of the combination. can be,
When the variable display position of the picture in the predetermined variable display area is within the first range, the situation where the corresponding stop operation means is operated is more favorable for the variable display of the picture in the predetermined variable display area. Compared to a situation where the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the position is in the second range is operated, a situation in which the variable display of the picture in the predetermined variable display area is started and then to the predetermined variable display area. Features F1 to F1 are characterized in that the period required until the acceleration by the acceleration control means is completed and the variable display position of the picture in the predetermined variable display area is determined to be a predetermined reference position is shortened. The gaming machine according to any one of F3.

According to feature F4, when the corresponding stop operation means is operated when the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area is within the first range, it becomes possible to display the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination. In the configuration, when the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is in the first range, the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is better in a situation after the corresponding stop operation means is operated. is in the second range, and acceleration to the predetermined variable display area is completed after the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is started than in a situation after the corresponding stop operation means is operated. The period required until it is determined that the variable display position of the picture in the predetermined variable display area has reached the predetermined reference position is shortened. Thereby, a situation in which the stop operation means is operated when the variable display position of the symbol in the predetermined variable display area is within the first range that allows display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination. In this case, it is possible to shorten the period required until the operation of the stop operation means is activated for the variable display of the picture in the predetermined variable display area.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the features of the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games can be played suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the symbols;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture;
Controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation device, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. a symbol display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
A predetermined response for executing a predetermined response process (processing of step S314 and step S315 of the main MPU 72) corresponding to the result of the game in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner under the control of the symbol display control means. A control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72),
After the picture is displayed in a variable manner under the control of the picture display control means and before the predetermined corresponding process is executed, a predetermined period measuring means (OFF continuation counter of the main side RAM 74) is used to display the picture for a predetermined period (OFF continuation). a measurement start means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the main MPU 72) that starts measurement of the period);
After the predetermined response process is executed and when the predetermined period measurement using the predetermined period measurement means is completed, a post-measurement completion process (the process of step S3307 of the main MPU 72) is executed. Process execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3307 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, the measurement for the predetermined period is started after the fluctuation display of the picture and before the predetermined corresponding process is executed, and the measurement for the predetermined period is completed after the predetermined corresponding process is executed. In this case, the post-measurement processing is executed. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined corresponding process when executing the post-measurement completion process after a predetermined period has elapsed after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the process suitably.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the post-measurement process is a process of switching the state of a predetermined external signal (AT signal) from a first state (LOW level) to a second state (HI level).

According to feature G2, when the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the first state to the second state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fluctuating display of the picture, the predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined corresponding process is measured. becomes possible.

Feature G3. Based on the fact that the switching condition is satisfied, the state of the predetermined external signal is changed to the second one after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner under the control of the pattern display control means and before the predetermined response process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G2, further comprising means for switching from the state to the first state (a function of executing the process of step S2317 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature G3, when the switching condition is satisfied, the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the second state to the first state after the fluctuating display of the symbol, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed thereafter, the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the second state to the first state. By switching the state from the first state to the second state, it becomes possible to make a device outside the gaming machine understand that the switching condition has been satisfied. In this case, the configuration of feature G1 is provided, and the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the second state to the first state after the fluctuating display of the picture and before the predetermined corresponding process is executed, and the measurement is performed for a predetermined period of time. is started and after the predetermined corresponding processing is executed, if measurement for a predetermined period is completed, the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to measure the predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined response process.

Feature G4. Any of features G1 to G3, characterized in that the predetermined corresponding process includes a process (processing in step S315 of the main MPU 72) of driving and controlling the payout means (hopper device 53) so that game media are paid out. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature G4, it is possible to measure a predetermined period including a period during which the payout means is drive-controlled so that game media are paid out.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the execution period of the predetermined corresponding process can be longer than the predetermined period.

According to characteristic G5, a situation occurs in which measurement for a predetermined period is completed in a situation where a predetermined response process is being executed. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the process after the measurement is completed without causing a period of waiting for the process.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature G group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that processing is executed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. a number storage means (credit counter 74b) for storing information on the number of game values available to the player;
a bet operation means (credit input button 47) operated to bet information on the number of game values stored in the number storage means;
a game control means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that starts the game when the start operation means (start lever 41) is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of the game values are bet; ,
A replay granting means (main system) that grants a predetermined replay benefit that enables the start of a new game without requiring a bet of gaming value when a predetermined replay win (special replay win) is achieved in the game. a function of executing the process of step S1407 in the side MPU 72);
a first display means (main side bet display section 64) that displays information on the number of gaming values that have been bet;
a second display means (performance side bet display section 69) that displays information on the number of gaming values that have been bet;
When the predetermined re-gaming win is achieved, the information on the number of bets on the gaming value on the first display means is displayed in the same way as when a re-gaming win different from the predetermined re-gaming win is achieved. a first display control means (a function for executing control processing of the bet display section in the main side MPU 72) that causes the display contents to change;
When the predetermined replay winning is achieved, the display of the information on the number of bets on the gaming value on the second display means is ended, and when a redisplay opportunity occurs thereafter, the display on the second display means a second display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1705, S1707, and S1711 in the production side MPU 92) for restarting the display of information on the number of gaming values that have been bet;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, the first display means and the second display means are provided as display means for displaying information on the number of gaming values that have been bet, thereby notifying the number of gaming values that have been bet. It becomes possible to diversify aspects. In this case, if a predetermined replay win is achieved, the display of information on the number of betted gaming values on the first display means is the same as when a replay win is achieved, which is different from the predetermined replay win. On the other hand, in the second display means, after the display of the information on the number of betted game values is once finished, an opportunity for re-display occurs and the number of betted games is displayed. The display of value number information resumes. As a result, by directing the player's attention to the second display means, it is possible to give the player the impression that a predetermined replay win has not been achieved even if a predetermined replay win has actually been achieved. By checking the first display means, the administrator can visually confirm whether or not a predetermined replay win has been achieved. Therefore, the game can be played suitably.

Feature H2. A main control means (main side MPU 72) that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means (production side MPU 92) that controls execution of production based on information transmitted from the main control means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the main control means has the first display control means, and the effect control means has the second display control means.

According to feature H2, in the first display means controlled by the main control means, the display of information on the number of gaming values bet when a predetermined replay win is achieved is different from that of the predetermined replay win. While the display content is the same as when a replay win is achieved, the second display means controlled by the performance control means displays the betted gaming value when a predetermined replay win is achieved. After the display of the number of pieces of information is once finished, it is resumed based on the occurrence of a re-display trigger. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display on the first display means controlled by the main control means, while increasing the presentation effect of the display on the second display means controlled by the presentation control means.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the display range of the second display means is set wider than the display range of the first display means.

According to feature H3, when a predetermined replay winning is achieved, the redisplay trigger is displayed after the display of the information on the number of gaming values bet is once finished on the second display means having a relatively wide display range. In contrast, on the first display means, which has a relatively narrow display range, a re-gaming win is established in which the display of information on the number of gaming values bet is different from the predetermined re-gaming winning. The display content will be the same as when As a result, by directing the player's attention to the second display means, it is possible to give the player the impression that a predetermined replay win has not been achieved even if a predetermined replay win has actually been achieved. By checking the first display means, the administrator can visually confirm whether or not a predetermined replay win has been achieved.

Feature H4. When the second display control means terminates the display of the information on the number of bets on the second display means due to the establishment of the predetermined replay winning, the second display control means controls the redisplay trigger after that. The game according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that when the bet operation means is operated, the second display means restarts displaying information on the number of the gaming values bet. Machine.

According to feature H4, when the display of the information on the number of betted gaming values on the second display means is once terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined replay winning, and when the bet operation means is operated thereafter. The display of information on the number of gaming values bet is restarted. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a new bet has been placed by operating the bet operation means even after a predetermined re-game winning has been achieved.

Feature H5. When the second display control means finishes displaying the information on the number of bets on the second display means as a result of the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, the second display control means then controls the bet operation means. The game according to feature H4, characterized in that even if the start operation means is operated without being operated, the display of information on the number of the gaming values bet on the second display means is resumed. Machine.

According to feature H5, if the display of the information on the number of betted gaming values on the second display means is once terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined replay winning, the bet operation means is not operated after that. However, if the start operation means is operated, the display of information on the number of game values bet is restarted. When a predetermined re-game winning is achieved, the state in which the game value is actually bet is maintained, so when the start operation means is operated, the game is started. In this case, even if the bet operation means is not operated as described above, if the start operation means is operated, the display of the information on the number of gaming values bet on the second display means is resumed. In a situation where the game has started, it is possible to display information on the number of game values on the second display means.

Feature H6. The second display control means controls the second display control means so that, when a plurality of game values are bet based on the operation of the bet operation means, a display corresponding to the fact that the plurality of game values have been bet is performed. 2. A stage changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S1702 and step S1707 in the production side MPU 92) for changing the display of the display means in stages,
The stage changing means terminates the multiple bet display corresponding to the fact that a plurality of gaming values have been bet on the second display means due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, and then When the bet operation means is operated, the display on the second display means is changed in stages to restart the plural bet display on the second display means,
The second display control means terminates the multiple bet display corresponding to the fact that a plurality of gaming values have been bet on the second display means due to the establishment of the predetermined re-gaming win, and then means for restarting the plurality of bets display on the second display means when the start operation means is operated without operating the bet operation means (a function for executing the process of step S1711 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature H6, in a configuration in which the display of the second display means is changed in stages so that multiple bets are displayed when multiple gaming values are bet, a predetermined replay winning is achieved. When the multiple bet display on the second display means is once ended and the bet operation means is operated after that, the display on the second display means is changed in stages so that the multiple bet display is performed. . This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a new bet has been placed by operating the bet operation means even after a predetermined re-game winning has been achieved. On the other hand, in the case where the multiple bet display on the second display means is temporarily terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined re-gaming win, and the start operation means is operated without operating the bet operation means after that, The multiple bet display is resumed as is on the second display means. Thereby, in a situation where the game has started, it is possible to display multiple bets on the second display means at an early stage.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature H group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games can be played suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the execution status of the game based on the operation of the start operation means;
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) that causes corresponding control to be executed;
Equipped with
As a role that can be won in the lottery process for the above-mentioned role, if the corresponding special prize (BB prize or RB prize) is not achieved in the winning game, the winning state will be maintained in the next game. Special roles (a role where BB winning data is set, a role where RB winning data is set) are set,
The winning combination lottery means is configured so that the special winning combination can be won in the lottery processing of the winning combination even if the special winning combination has been won,
This gaming machine provides an invalidating means (a step in the main MPU 72) for invalidating the new winning of the special prize when the special prize is won in the lottery process of the prize in a state where the special prize is won. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of making an affirmative determination in S602.

According to feature I1, when a special prize is won in the lottery process, even if the corresponding special prize is not achieved in the winning game, the winning state of the special prize will continue in the next game. maintained. In this case, even if the special role has been won, the special role can be won in the lottery process for the role, and even if the special role has been won, the special role can be won in the lottery process for the role. In this case, the election of that new special role will be treated as invalid. As a result, while preventing a state where multiple special prizes are won at the same time, the execution mode of lottery processing for winning combinations is made common between states in which no special prize has been won and states in which a special prize has been won. becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the process suitably.

Feature I2. The role lottery means is
Acquisition means for acquiring lottery numerical value information (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main MPU 72);
A winning corresponding information group (a winning lottery table in a non-bonus state) that makes it possible to identify which winning combination the lottery numerical value information acquired by the acquisition means has won, and the lottery numerical information acquired by the acquisition means a lottery execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S502 to S508 in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process of the winning combination using the
It is equipped with
Feature I1 is characterized in that the lottery executing means uses the common winning correspondence information group regardless of whether the special prize is not won or the special prize is won. The game machine described.

According to feature I2, a common winning correspondence information group is used regardless of whether the special winning combination has not been won or the special winning combination has been won. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the winning correspondence information group in advance.

Feature I3. The special role includes a first special role (a role where BB winning data is set) and a second special role (a role where RB winning data is set),
The invalidating means is such that when one of the first special prize and the second special prize is won, the other of the first special prize and the second special prize is won in a lottery process for the prize. If so, the gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the winning of the new special winning combination is invalidated.

According to feature I3, in a configuration in which the execution content of the winning combination lottery process is not changed depending on whether or not a special winning combination has been won, when one of the first special winning combination and the second special winning combination has been won, the other Even if a player wins, the newly winning side is invalidated, so it is possible to prevent the first special prize and the second special prize from being won at the same time.

Feature I4. If you win the special prize, you can also win a special prize (a prize for which cherry winning data is set) in which the winning state is not carried over to the next game.
The invalidation means invalidates the new winning of the special role if both the special role and the specific role are won in the lottery process of the role in a state where the special role has been won; The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that winning of the specific combination is not invalidated.

According to feature I4, in the winning combination lottery process, a special winning state whose winning state can be carried over to the next game and a specific winning state whose winning state cannot be carried over to the next game can be won at the same time. In this case, if you win both the special role and the specific role in the role lottery process while you have already won the special role, the new special role winning will be invalidated, while the specific role winning will be invalidated. Not invalidated. As a result, in a configuration that does not change the execution content of the winning combination lottery process depending on whether or not a special winning combination has been won, the profit from winning a specific winning combination can be saved while preventing a situation where multiple special winning combinations have been won at the same time. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to H6, any one or more of the features I1 to I4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the above feature group I, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that processing is executed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotating body starts rotating based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player A gaming machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R... Reel, 36... Reel index sensor, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 47... Credit input button, 53... Hopper device, 63... Image Display device, 64...Main side bet display section, 69...Production side bet display section, 72...Main side MPU, 74...Main side RAM, 74b...Credit counter, 74c...Continued game number counter, 74d...Total acquisition number counter, 92...Production side MPU, G3...Switching period image.

Claims (1)

A situation setting means for setting a specific situation in which advantageous transfer is possible;
advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player in the case of the specific situation;
first advantageous termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a state termination opportunity in the advantageous gaming state;
a first situation ending means that ends the specific situation to become a predetermined situation based on the occurrence of a situation ending opportunity in the specific situation;
a second advantageous termination means that terminates the advantageous gaming state even if the condition termination opportunity has not occurred when the specific situation is terminated by the first situation termination means;
when the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous termination means, a second situation termination means terminates the specific situation and sets the predetermined situation even if the situation termination opportunity has not occurred;
termination correspondence display execution means for causing a display means to perform a termination correspondence display when the advantageous gaming state ends, and for causing the termination correspondence display to continue until the specific situation is newly set;
a setting means for setting a setting value corresponding to a player's advantage as a target for use;
It is possible to execute a suggestion performance that makes it possible to suggest the setting value set as the target of use in a situation where the advantageous gaming state and the specific situation are ended and the second situation ending means becomes the predetermined situation. Meanwhile, means for preventing the suggestion effect from being executed in the predetermined situation after the start of supply of predetermined operating power;
Equipped with
The predetermined situation when the specific situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity is better than the predetermined situation when the specific situation ends in a situation where the situation end opportunity has not occurred. , A gaming machine characterized in that the above-mentioned suggestion effect is easily executed .

Images